FCC ID: I88EX5510-B0 Dual-band Wireless AX Gigabit Ethernet Gateway, Wireless AX 10G PON Gateway with VoIP, Wireless AX VDSL Bonding Gateway

IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Related Documentation support.zyxel.com Document Conventions Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Warnings and Notes Syntax Conventions

> Routing > DNS Route Network Setting DNS Route Icons Used in Figures bold Network Setting Routing Contents Overview Users Guide ......................................................................................................................................15 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................57 Troubleshooting and Appendices .................................................................................................285 Table of Contents Document Conventions ......................................................................................................................3 Contents Overview .............................................................................................................................4 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................6 Part I: Users Guide.......................................................................................... 15 Chapter 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device ...........................................................................................................16 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................23 Chapter 3 Quick Start Wizard..............................................................................................................................31 Chapter 4 Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................35 Part II: Technical Reference........................................................................... 57 Chapter 5 Connection Status..............................................................................................................................58 Chapter 6 Broadband..........................................................................................................................................72 Chapter 7 Wireless .............................................................................................................................................100 Chapter 8 Home Networking ............................................................................................................................131 Chapter 9 Routing ..............................................................................................................................................150 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)..................................................................................................................158 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) ................................................................................................179 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup.........................................................................................................................196 Chapter 13 IGMP/MLD.........................................................................................................................................200 Chapter 14 VLAN Group......................................................................................................................................203 Chapter 15 Interface Grouping ..........................................................................................................................206 Chapter 16 Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................213 Chapter 17 MAC Filter .........................................................................................................................................222 Chapter 18 Scheduler Rule .................................................................................................................................224 Chapter 19 Certificates .......................................................................................................................................226 Chapter 20 Log ....................................................................................................................................................233 Chapter 21 Traffic Status .....................................................................................................................................236 Chapter 22 ARP Table ..........................................................................................................................................240 Chapter 23 Routing Table....................................................................................................................................242 Chapter 24 Multicast Status ...............................................................................................................................245 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics ...................................................................................................................................247 Chapter 26 WLAN Station Status .........................................................................................................................250 Chapter 27 Cellular Statistics .............................................................................................................................252 Chapter 28 System...............................................................................................................................................254 Chapter 29 User Account....................................................................................................................................255 Chapter 30 Remote Management .....................................................................................................................258 Chapter 31 SNMP .................................................................................................................................................261 Chapter 32 Time Settings.....................................................................................................................................264 Chapter 33 E-mail Notification ...........................................................................................................................267 Chapter 34 Log Setting .......................................................................................................................................270 Chapter 35 Firmware Upgrade ...........................................................................................................................274 Chapter 36 Backup/Restore ...............................................................................................................................277 Chapter 37 Diagnostic.........................................................................................................................................280 Part III: Troubleshooting and Appendices .................................................. 285 Chapter 38 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................286 Index .................................................................................................................................................316 PART I Users Guide C HAP T ER 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device 1.1 Overview 1.1.1 Multi-Gigabit 1.2 Example Applications 1.2.1 Internet Access Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 1.3 Ways to Manage the Zyxel Device 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Zyxel Device 1.5 Hardware 1.5.1 Front Panel Figure 5 LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION 1.5.2 Rear Panel Figure 6 LABEL DESCRIPTION 1.5.3 Using the WPS Button WPS POWER WPS WPS WPS 1.5.4 The RESET Button RESET POWER POWER RESET POWER C HAP T ER 2 The Web Configurator 2.1 Overview 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator admin Login Figure 7 Login Skip Figure 8 Change password Wizard Wizard Connection Status Wizard Figure 9 2.2 Web Configurator Layout Figure 10 A B X 2.2.1 Navigation Panel 2.2.1.1 Configuration Menus LINK TAB FUNCTION LINK TAB FUNCTION Port Forwarding LINK TAB FUNCTION Maintenance Remote Management MGMT Services 2.2.1.2 Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Wizard Wizard Theme Language Restart Logout C HAP T ER 3 Quick Start Wizard 3.1 Overview Wizard 3.2 Wizard Setup Wizard Wizard Wizard Wizard Lets Go Skip Wizard Figure 11 3.2.1 Time Zone Next Figure 12 3.2.2 Internet Next Wizard Figure 13 Skip Figure 14 Next Next Figure 15 Next Figure 16 Unsuccessful Internet Connection Figure 17 Next 3.2.3 WiFi Keep 2.4G and 5G the same Done Figure 18 Wizard C HAP T ER 4 Tutorials 4.1 Overview 4.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network 4.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings SSID Security Mode Pre-Shared Key 802.11 Mode Network Setting Wireless WPA2-PSK Apply General More Secure Wireless > Others 802.11b/g/n/ax Mixed 802.11 Mode Apply 4.2.2 Using WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) PIN Configuration Push Button Configuration (PBC) WPS Network Setting > Wireless > WPS Apply Connect Figure 19 PIN Configuration WPS PIN Entry Apply Network Setting > Wireless > WPS Register Figure 20 4.2.3 Without WPS 4.3 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups Company VIP Guest COMPANY VIP GUEST SSID Security Level Security Mode Pre-Shared Key Network Setting > Wireless General Apply Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP Edit Apply Guest More AP Edit Apply VIP Guest Guest More AP 4.4 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network R N2 N2 B B R N1 A N1 N2 B R A R R DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS A R R B N1 N2 Network Setting Routing Add new Static Route Static Route Static Route Setup Active Route Name R IP Type IPv4 N2 Use Gateway IP Address ETHWAN Use Interface Destination IP Address 192.168.10.0 IP Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253 R Gateway IP Address OK B A B 4.5 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup Network Setting > QoS > General QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Apply Network Queue Setup Add new Queue Active Name Interface WAN Priority Weight Rate Limit Network QoS Classification Setup Active Add new Classification Enable Class Name From Interface Ether Type IP Address MAC Address To Queue Index IP E-mail LAN1 192.168.1.23 IP Subnet Mask AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF MAC Mask Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup E-mail E-mail IP Protocol Source 4.6 Access the Zyxel Device Using DDNS 4.6.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org http://www.dyndns.org UserName1 12345 zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Host with IP address Status 4.6.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Zyxel Device Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS Enable Dynamic DNS www.DynDNS.com zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Host Name UserName1 12345 Apply 4.6.3 Testing the DDNS Setting a.b.c.d 4.7 Configuring the MAC Address Filter http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Security > MAC Filter Security MAC Filter MAC Filter Enable Allow Add a new setting Apply

PART II Technical Reference C HAP T ER 5 Connection Status 5.1 Overview Connection Status 5.2 Connectivity Figure 21 Figure 22 5.2.1 Icon and Device Name Figure 23 Device Name Save 5.3 System Info Figure 24 Figure 25 LABEL DESCRIPTION Release Maintenance > Reboot LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Relay None 5.4 WiFi Settings Figure 26 Figure 27 Keep 2.4G and 5G the same LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Random Password Random Password Password Save Network Setting Wireless WPS WiFi 5.5 Guest WiFi Settings Figure 28 Figure 29 LABEL DESCRIPTION same WiFi Settings Guest WiFi Settings Keep 2.4G and 5G the Figure 30 LABEL DESCRIPTION Random Password Random Password Password Save Network Setting Wireless WPS WiFi 5.6 LAN Settings Figure 31 Figure 32 LABEL DESCRIPTION Save 5.7 Parental Control Figure 33 Parental Control Add New PCP Edit Figure 34 Security LABEL DESCRIPTION 5.7.1 Create a Parental Control Profile Add more Profile Figure 35 LABEL DESCRIPTION 5.7.2 Define a Schedule Next Figure 36 LABEL DESCRIPTION All Day Back Save Delete Edit Figure 37 5.8 Layout Icon C HAP T ER 6 Broadband 6.1 Overview Broadband Figure 38 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Broadband Cellular Backup Advanced GEWAN or SFP LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION CONNECTION DSL LINK TYPE MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION CONNECTION DSL LINK TYPE MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS 6.1.2 What You Need to Know WAN IP Address ATM PTM IPv6 Introduction IPv6 Addressing IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length IPv6 Subnet Masking IPv6 Rapid Deployment IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv4 Only Figure 39 Dual Stack Lite Figure 40 IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv6 Only 6.1.3 Before You Begin 6.2 Broadband Settings Network Setting Broadband Figure 41 LABEL DESCRIPTION N/A N/A LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection Add New WAN Interface Broadband 6.2.1.1 Routing Mode Routing Routing PPPoE Figure 42 LABEL DESCRIPTION Routing IPv4 Only IPv6 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack Auto Connect On Demand Routing Mode ADSL/VDSL over ATM Ethernet PPPoE IPoE. ADSL over ATM PPPoE IPoE PPPoA IPoA Encapsulation Routing Mode PPPoE PPPoA password unmask Auto Connect PPP Connection Trigger PPPoE over ATM Type PPPoA IPoA Encapsulation ADSL ADSL over ATM Type PPPoA IPoA Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv4/IPv6 Mode IPv4 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv4/IPv6 Mode Obtain DNS Info Automically Use Following Static DNS Address IPv4 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv4/IPv6 Mode NAT Only IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv4 Manually Configured Automatically configured by DHCPC Automatically configured by DHCPC IPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION IPoE Encapsulation Option 43 Option 121 Manually Configured IPv4 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv4/IPv6 Mode Obtain an IPv6 Address Automatically IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode Static IPv6 Address IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode Obtain IPv6 DNS Info Automatically Use Following Static IPv6 DNS Address IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode ADSL over ATM Type LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING:

PPPoE VC/MUX:

Select DSL Link Type IPoE Factory Default UBR Without PCR CBR Non Realtime VBR Realtime VBR LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply Figure 43 Add new WAN Interface Network Setting > Broadband Edit Bridge LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Bridge ADSL over ATM Type LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING:

PPPoE VC/MUX:

Select DSL Link Type IPoE Factory Default UBR Without PCR CBR Non Realtime VBR Realtime VBR Cancel Apply 6.3 The Cellular Backup Screen Consecutive Fail Figure 44 Network Setting > Broadband > Cellular Backup Drop Current Cellular Connection Time Budget Data Budget Time Budget Data Budget Figure 45

Figure 46 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION N/A Nailed UP on Demand Max Idle Timeout Use the following static IP address LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance E-mail Notification Maintenance E-mail Notification Download/Upload Download Upload Download/Upload Download Upload last specific LABEL DESCRIPTION Keep Drop Maintenance Email Notification Maintenance Email Notification Cancel Apply 6.4 The Broadband Advanced Screen Advanced PROFILE BANDWIDTH

(MHZ) NUMBER OF DOWNSTREAM CARRIERS CARRIER BANDWIDTH

(KHZ) POWER (DBM) MAX. DOWNSTREAM THROUGHPUT

(MBIT/S) Network Setting Broadband Advanced Figure 47 LABEL DESCRIPTION

PhyR US PhyR DS Enable Enable Enable State State Apply Type LABEL DESCRIPTION

Cancel Apply 6.5 GEWAN or SFP Network Setting Broadband Ethernet Encapsulation IPoE Network Setting Broadband GEWAN or SFP Figure 48 6.6 Technical Reference Encapsulation IP over Ethernet PPP over ATM (PPPoA) PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) RFC 1483 Multiplexing Traffic Shaping Figure 49 ATM Traffic Classes IP Address Assignment Introduction to VLANs Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Multicast DNS Server Address Assignment IPv6 Addressing IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length

C HAP T ER 7 Wireless 7.1 Wireless Overview Network Setting > Wireless 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Wireless General Guest/More AP MAC Authentication WPS WMM Others Channel Status 7.1.2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics WiFi6 / IEEE 802.11ax WIFI STANDARD MAXIMUM LINK RATE *

BAND SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIONS Finding Out More 7.2 Wireless General Settings PSK More Secure WPA2-

Apply Network Setting Wireless General Figure 50 LABEL DESCRIPTION Keep 2.4G and 5G the same 5GHz 2.4GHz 20MHz 40MHz, 20/40MHz 20/

Auto 40/80MHz 20MHz 40MHz Upper Channel Bandwidth Lower Network Wireless WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION More Secure (Recommended) No Security Cancel Apply 7.2.1 No Security No Security Figure 51 LABEL DESCRIPTION No Security 7.2.2 More Secure (Recommended) Network Setting Wireless General More Secure WPA2-PSK WPA2-EAP Security Mode Figure 52 LABEL DESCRIPTION More Secure WPA2-PSK WPA2-EAP Generate password automatically Password AES WPA2-EAP Security Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA2-EAP Security Mode Timer 7.3 Guest/More AP Network Setting > Wireless Guest/More AP WIRELESS NETWORKS WHERE TO CONFIGURE Figure 53 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Home Guest External Guest N/A Edit 7.3.1 The Edit Guest/More AP Screen Edit Guest/More AP Figure 54 LABEL DESCRIPTION Scenario Home Guest External Guest Access Enable Keep 2.4G and 5G the same Network Wireless WPS Network Wireless > General More Secure (Recommended) No Security WPA2-PSK WPA2-EAP LABEL DESCRIPTION Generate password automatically AES WPA2-EAP Security Mode WPA2-EAP Security Mode Timer Cancel OK 7.4 MAC Authentication

(Deny)

(Allow) Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication Figure 55 MAC Address Deny Allow MAC Restrict Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Disable Deny Allow Edit Delete Cancel Apply 7.4.1 Add/Edit MAC Addresses Add new MAC address Network Setting Wireless MAC Authentication Figure 56 7.5 WPS Settings PBC SSID1 SSID1 WPA2-PSK No Security Network Setting > Wireless > WPS Apply Figure 57 LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply WPS Apply LABEL DESCRIPTION Register Apply Generate New PIN Cancel Apply 7.6 WMM Settings Network Setting > Wireless > WMM Figure 58 WMM WMM Automatic Power Save APSD WMM APSD WMM LABEL DESCRIPTION On 802.11 Mode Network Setting > Wireless > Others Cancel Apply 7.7 Others Settings Figure 59 Network Setting > Wireless > Others LABEL DESCRIPTION 60% 80% 100%

20% 40%

802.11b Only 802.11g Only 802.11n Only 802.11b/g Mixed 802.11b/g/n Mixed 802.11b/g/n/ax Mixed 802.11a Only 802.11n Only 802.11ac Only 802.11a/n Mixed 802.11n/ac Mixed 802.11a/n/ac Mixed 802.11a/n/ac/ax Mixed LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Off Disable Capable Required Cancel Apply Off 802.11 Mode 802.11b Only Long Short Network Setting > Wireless > General 802.11 Mode 802.11b WPA2 Security Mode AES 7.8 Channel Status Settings Channel Status Wireless > Channel Status Channel Scan Result Scan Network Setting >

Figure 60 7.9 Technical Reference 7.9.1 Wireless Network Overview Figure 61 Radio Channels AP A B 7.9.2 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION 7.9.3 Wireless Security Overview 7.9.3.1 SSID 7.9.3.2 MAC Address Filter 7.9.3.3 User Authentication 7.9.3.4 Encryption 7.9.4 Signal Problems 7.9.5 BSS Figure 62 7.9.6 MBSSID 7.9.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs 7.9.7 Preamble Type 7.9.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) 7.9.8.1 Push Button Configuration 7.9.8.2 PIN Configuration Figure 63 7.9.8.3 How WPS Works Figure 64 7.9.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup Client 1 1 AP1 Client 1 AP1 Figure 65 2 AP1 Client 2 Figure 66 Client 1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP2 AP2 AP1 Client 2 Figure 67 7.9.8.5 Limitations of WPS

C HAP T ER 8 Home Networking 8.1 Home Networking Overview Figure 68 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter LAN Setup Static DHCP UPnP Additional Subnet STB Vendor ID Wake on LAN TFTP Server Name 8.1.2 What You Need To Know 8.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP DNS RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) 8.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices NAT Traversal Cautions with UPnP UPnP and Zyxel Finding Out More 8.1.3 Before You Begin 8.2 LAN Setup Network Setting > Home Networking LAN Setup IP Address IP Subnet Mask Apply Figure 69 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Standard Mode Blocking Mode Enable Disable DHCP Relay DNS Proxy Static DHCP Relay DHCP Enable DHCP Enable DHCP Enable DHCP From ISP LABEL DESCRIPTION Standard Mode Blocking Mode Stateless Stateful From Router Advertisement From DHCPv6 Server From RA & DHCPv6 Server DHCP Server LABEL DESCRIPTION From ISP User-Defined None IPv4/IPv6 DNS Server IPv6 DNS Server Only IPv4 DNS Server Only IPv6 DNS Server First IPv4 DNS Server First Cancel Apply 8.3 LAN Static DHCP Networking > Static DHCP Figure 70 Network Setting > Home LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete Static DHCP Configuration Static DHCP Edit Figure 71 LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 Manual Input Manual Input Manual Input LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 8.4 UPnP Settings UPnP NAT-T NAT Network Setting Broadband Edit Add New Network Setting >

Home Networking > UPnP WAN Interface Figure 72 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.4.1 Turning on UPnP in Windows 7 Example Control Panel Network and Sharing Center. Change Advanced Sharing Settings Turn on network discovery Save Changes 8.4.2 Turning on UPnP in Windows 10 Example Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP Settings Network & Internet Network and Sharing Center Change advanced sharing settings Domain Turn on network discovery Save Changes 8.5 LAN Additional Subnet Public LAN Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet Figure 73 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.6 STB Vendor ID Network Setting Home Networking STB Vendor ID Figure 74 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.7 Wake on LAN Network Setting Home Networking Wake on LAN Figure 75 LABEL DESCRIPTION Manual 8.8 TFTP Server Name TFTP Server Name Network Setting Home Networking TFTP Server Name Figure 76 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.9 Technical Reference 8.9.1 LANs, WANs and the Zyxel Device Figure 77 8.9.2 DHCP Setup IP Pool Setup 8.9.3 DNS Server Addresses 8.9.4 LAN TCP/IP IP Address and Subnet Mask DNS Server DHCP Setup DHCP Setup Private IP Addresses C HAP T ER 9 Routing A A R1 R2 R3 9.1 Overview Figure 78 9.2 Routing Settings Network Setting > Routing > Static Route Figure 79 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Add new static route Routing Edit Gateway IP Address Interface Use Figure 80 LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 IPv6 Cancel Apply 9.3 DNS Route Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route Figure 81 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 9.3.1 Add DNS Route Setting > Routing > DNS Route Add New DNS Route Network Figure 82 LABEL DESCRIPTION ETHWAN 9.4 Policy Route Setting > Routing > Policy Route Policy Route Figure 83 Network LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Route Add New Policy Route Policy Route Edit Figure 84 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ETHWAN WWAN ADSL VDSL MyDSLConnection LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 9.5 RIP Settings Network Setting > Routing > RIP RIP Figure 85 2 1 1 LABEL DESCRIPTION Passive Active Cancel Apply

C HAP T ER 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.1 QoS Overview 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter General Queue Setup Classification Setup Shaper Setup Policer Setup Monitor Setup 10.2 What You Need to Know QoS versus CoS Tagging and Marking Traffic Shaping Traffic Policing 10.3 Quality of Service General Settings Network Setting > QoS > General WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Upstream Traffic Priority Upstream Traffic Priority Upstream Traffic Priority QoS None Figure 86 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable LABEL DESCRIPTION None:

Ethernet Priority:

IP Precedence:

Packet Length:

Cancel Apply 10.4 Queue Setup Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup Priority Figure 87 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Add New Queue Edit Queue Setup Figure 88 LABEL DESCRIPTION Drop Tail (DT) Drop Tail (DT) Cancel OK 10.5 QoS Classification Setup Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup Figure 89 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Add New Classification Classification Setup Edit Figure 90 From LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Last Interface IP 802.1Q TCP UDP IP Protocol TCP UDP IP Protocol LABEL DESCRIPTION User defined TCP UDP ICMP IGMP Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60) Client ID (DHCP Option 61) User Class ID (DHCP Option 77) Vendor Specific Info (DHCP Option 125) IP Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type 802.1Q Ether Type 802.1Q Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type Remark Unchange Remark Remove Add Unchange Queue Setup Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Unchange Unchange Cancel OK 10.6 QoS Shaper Setup Figure 91 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Shaper Add New Shaper Shaper Setup Edit Figure 92 ETHWAN WWAN ADSL VDSL MyDSLConnection LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 10.7 QoS Policer Setup

> QoS > Policer Setup Figure 93 Network Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.7.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer Add New Policer Policer Setup Edit Figure 94 LABEL DESCRIPTION Simple Token Bucket Single Rate Three Color Marker Two Rate Three Color Marker b LABEL DESCRIPTION Pass:

DSCP Mark:

Drop:

DSCP Mark:

Selected Class Cancel OK 10.8 QoS Monitor Figure 95 Available Class

Selected Class

Network Setting QoS Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION None LABEL DESCRIPTION 10.9 Technical Reference IEEE 802.1Q Tag PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE DiffServ DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior IP Precedence Automatic Priority Queue Assignment LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY QUEUE IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY (ETHERNET PRIORITY) TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH

(BYTE) LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY QUEUE IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY (ETHERNET PRIORITY) TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH

(BYTE) Token Bucket b b C HAP T ER 11 Network Address Translation

(NAT) 11.1 NAT Overview 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 11.1.2 What You Need To Know Port Forwarding Port Triggering DMZ ALG Sessions Address Mapping Inside/Outside Global/Local NAT Port Forwarding Finding Out More 11.2 Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) B A C Figure 96 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding Figure 97 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete TCP UDP TCP/UDP 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding Add New Rule Port Forwarding Edit Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port Start Start Port Figure 98 LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Start Port End Port End Start Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Cancel OK 11.3 Port Triggering TCP UDP TCP/UDP Figure 99 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering Figure 100 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 11.3.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule Edit Add new rule Port Triggering Figure 101 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Disable TCP UDP TCP/UDP TCP UDP TCP/UDP Cancel OK 11.4 DMZ Settings Apply Address Figure 102 Apply Default Server Address Default Server LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT Port Forwarding Default Server Address NAT Port Forwarding Cancel Apply 11.5 ALG Settings Setting > NAT > ALG Network Figure 103 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 11.6 Address Mapping Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping Figure 104 One-to-One Many-to-One One-to-One Many-to-

LABEL DESCRIPTION One One-to-One Many-to-One Many-to-Many Edit Delete 11.6.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule Mapping Add new rule Address Figure 105 LABEL DESCRIPTION One-to-One Many-to-One Many-to-Many One Cancel OK 11.7 NAT Sessions One-to-One Many-to-One One-to-One Many-to-

Setting > NAT > Sessions Apply Figure 106 Network MAX NAT Session Per Host MAX NAT Session Per Host Apply LABEL DESCRIPTION 11.8 Technical Reference 11.8.1 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION 11.8.2 What NAT Does Address Translator (NAT) 11.8.3 How NAT Works RFC 1631 The IP Network Figure 107 11.8.4 NAT Application Figure 108 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER Port Forwarding Example B Figure 109 A C

C HAP T ER 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.1 DNS Overview DNS Broadband Dynamic DNS 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter DNS Entry Dynamic DNS 12.1.2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard DNS DNS Entry Network Setting >

12.2 DNS Entry Figure 110 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry Entry DNS Entry Edit Add New DNS Figure 111 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 12.3 Dynamic DNS Figure 112 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Success Cancel Apply C HAP T ER 13 IGMP/MLD 13.1 IGMP/MLD Overview IGMP/MLD 13.1.1 What You Need To Know Multicast and IGMP Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) IGMP Fast Leave 13.2 IGMP/MLD Settings Network Setting > IGMP/MLD Figure 113 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply C HAP T ER 14 VLAN Group 14.1 Overview Figure 114 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 14.2 VLAN Group Settings Figure 115 LAN Setup page Network Setting > Vlan Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 14.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group Add New VLAN Group Vlan Group Figure 116 LABEL DESCRIPTION TX Tagging Include TX Tagging Apply Cancel VLAN ID C HAP T ER 15 Interface Grouping 15.1 Interface Grouping Overview 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Interface Grouping 15.2 Interface Grouping Setup LAN Figure 117 Network Setting > Interface Grouping Figure 118 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration Add New Interface Group Interface Grouping Figure 119 Selected LAN Interfaces Available LAN Selected LAN Interfaces LABEL DESCRIPTION None Interfaces Add Edit Delete Apply Cancel 15.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria Add Interface Grouping Configuration Figure 120 LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Setting > Vlan Group Apply Cancel C HAP T ER 16 Firewall 16.1 Firewall Overview A Figure 121 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter General Protocol Access Control DoS 16.1.2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack DoS DDoS LAND Attack Ping of Death SPI 16.2 Firewall Settings High Security > Firewall General Figure 122 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Low Medium High Cancel Apply 16.3 Protocol Settings Protocol Security > Firewall > Protocol Figure 123 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP TCP/UDP Other Edit Delete 16.3.1 Add New/Edit Protocol Entry Add New Protocol Entry Edit Protocol Figure 124 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP ICMPv6 Other Other Other TCP UDP TCP UDP ICMPv6 Any Single Any Single Range Range Cancel OK 16.4 Access Control Security > Firewall > Access Control Figure 125 LABEL DESCRIPTION Any Any ACCEPT Edit Delete Move To DROP REJECT 16.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule Add new ACL rule Edit Access Control Figure 126 LABEL DESCRIPTION Specific IP Address Specific IP Address LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 IPv6 TCP/UDP TCP UDP ICMP ICMPv6 Security > Firewall > Protocol > Add Specific Service Specific Protocol Select Service Specific Protocol Select Service Specific Protocol Select Service Specific Protocol Select Service TCP SYN ACK URG PSH Specific Protocol Select Service ICMPv6 DROP REJECT ACCEPT TCP UDP Protocol TCP UDP Protocol Protocol RST FIN Add New Rule Security > Scheduler Rules Cancel OK 16.5 DoS Settings DoS Security > Firewall > DoS Figure 127 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Cancel Apply C HAP T ER 17 MAC Filter 17.1 MAC Filter Overview MAC Filter 17.2 MAC Filter Settings MAC Address Filter Figure 128 Security MAC Filter Active Figure 129 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Allow Deny Delete Cancel Apply Active Allow C HAP T ER 18 Scheduler Rule 18.1 Scheduler Rule Overview 18.2 Scheduler Rule Settings Security > Scheduler Rule Figure 130 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule Rule Add New Rule Scheduler Rule Edit Figure 131 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK C HAP T ER 19 Certificates 19.1 Certificates Overview 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Local Certificates Trusted CA 19.2 What You Need to Know Certification Authority 19.3 Local Certificates Security > Certificates Local Certificates Figure 132 LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Not Yet Valid!

Expiring!

Expired!

View Load Signed Remove 19.3.1 Create Certificate Request Security Certificates Local Certificates Create Certificate Request Figure 133 LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Customize Cancel OK 19.3.2 View Certificate Request View Local Certificates Private Key Certificate Figure 134 LABEL DESCRIPTION ca LABEL DESCRIPTION Back 19.4 Trusted CA Security > Certificates > Trusted CA Figure 135 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION ca View Remove 19.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate View Trusted CA Figure 136 LABEL DESCRIPTION Back 19.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Import Certificate Trusted CA Figure 137 LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Cancel OK C HAP T ER 20 Log System Errors View Log 20.1 Log Overview 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter System Log Security Log 20.1.2 What You Need To Know Alerts and Logs Syslog Overview CODE SEVERITY CODE SEVERITY 20.2 System Log System Log Category Figure 138 LABEL DESCRIPTION System Monitor > Log System Log Level Setting Maintenance > Logs Level Category System Monitor >

20.3 Security Log Security Log Log > Security Log Figure 139 LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Maintenance > Logs C HAP T ER 21 Traffic Status 21.1 Traffic Status Overview 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Traffic Status WAN LAN NAT 21.2 WAN Status System Monitor > Traffic Status WAN Figure 140 LABEL DESCRIPTION 21.3 LAN Status System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION 21.4 NAT Status System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT Figure 141 LABEL DESCRIPTION

C HAP T ER 22 ARP Table 22.1 ARP Table Overview 22.1.1 How ARP Works 22.2 ARP Table Settings System Monitor ARP Table Figure 142 LABEL DESCRIPTION C HAP T ER 23 Routing Table 23.1 Routing Table Overview 23.2 Routing Table Settings System Monitor Routing Table Figure 143 LABEL DESCRIPTION U-Up:

!-Reject:

G-Gateway:

H-Host:

R-Reinstate:

D-Dynamic (redirect):

M-Modified (redirect):

LABEL DESCRIPTION brx ethx ppp0 wlx wl0 wl0 wl1 wl1 C HAP T ER 24 Multicast Status 24.1 Multicast Status Overview Multicast Status 24.2 IGMP Status Status > IGMP Status Figure 144 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD System Monitor > Multicast LABEL DESCRIPTION INCLUDE EXCLUDE Source List Source List 24.3 MLD Status Status > MLD Status Figure 145 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD System Monitor > Multicast LABEL DESCRIPTION INCLUDE EXCLUDE Source List Source List C HAP T ER 25 xDSL Statistics 25.1 xDSL Statistics Figure 146 DSL statistics System Monitor > xDSL Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Inactive LABEL DESCRIPTION C HAP T ER 26 WLAN Station Status 26.1 WLAN Station Status Overview System Monitor > WLAN Station Status Figure 147 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION 5 4 3 2 1 C HAP T ER 27 Cellular Statistics 27.1 Cellular Statistics Overview Cellular Statistics 27.2 The Cellular Statistics Screen System Monitor > Cellular Statistics Figure 148 LABEL DESCRIPTION No Refresh GSM GPRS EDGE WCDMA HSDPA HSUPA HSPA C HAP T ER 28 System 28.1 System Overview 28.2 System Settings Maintenance > System Figure 149 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply C HAP T ER 29 User Account 29.1 User Account Overview admin 29.2 User Account Settings Maintenance > User Account Figure 150 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete Cancel Apply 29.2.1 User Account Add/Edit Add New Account Edit Figure 151 Administrator User Retry Times Maintenance > User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Disable User Name Password LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator User Retry Times Administrator System Network Settings Security Cancel OK User Administrator C HAP T ER 30 Remote Management 30.1 Remote Management Overview Remote Management 30.2 MGMT Services Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services Figure 152 LABEL DESCRIPTION Any_WAN Multi_WAN Enable Enable Enable Domain Cancel Apply Maintenance > Remote MGMT > Trust Trust Domain WAN Trust Domain 30.3 Trust Domain Figure 153 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services Maintenance Remote Management > Trust Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete 30.4 Add Trust Domain Add Trust Domain Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain Figure 154 LABEL DESCRIPTION OK Cancel C HAP T ER 31 SNMP 31.1 SNMP Overview Figure 155 31.2 SNMP Settings Maintenance > SNMP Figure 156 LABEL DESCRIPTION Get Community Set Community Trap Community Apply Cancel C HAP T ER 32 Time Settings 32.1 Time Settings Overview 32.2 Time Maintenance > Time Figure 157 LABEL DESCRIPTION Other None Time Time Hour Hour Cancel Apply Second Sunday March 2 March o'clock 2 Hour Last Sunday First Sunday November 2 October o'clock Hour 2 Last Sunday C HAP T ER 33 E-mail Notification 33.1 E-mail Notification Overview 33.2 E-mail Notification Settings Maintenance > E-mail Notification E-mail Notification Figure 158 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION 33.2.1 E-mail Notification Edit Add E-mail Notification Figure 159 LABEL DESCRIPTION Account e-mail Address Account e-mail Address SSL STARTTLS LABEL DESCRIPTION C HAP T ER 34 Log Setting 34.1 Logs Setting Overview Logs Setting 34.2 Log Settings Maintenance > Log Setting Syslog Logging Remote Local File and Remote Mode Local File Local File and Syslog Server Remote Remote Figure 160 LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote Local File Local File and Remote LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance > E-mail Notification Cancel Apply 34.2.1 Example E-mail Log Figure 161 C HAP T ER 35 Firmware Upgrade 35.1 Firmware Upgrade Overview Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Zyxel Device. 35.2 Firmware Upgrade Settings Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade Do NOT turn off the Zyxel Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 162 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Figure 163 Upgrade Figure 164 Status OK Firmware C HAP T ER 36 Backup/Restore 36.1 Backup/Restore Overview 36.2 Backup/Restore Settings Maintenance > Backup/Restore Figure 165 Backup Configuration Backup Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Do NOT turn off the Zyxel Device while configuration file upload is in progress. Figure 166 Configuration Figure 167 Reset to Factory Defaults Reset OK Figure 168 Figure 169 RESET RESET 36.3 Reboot Maintenance > Reboot Reboot Figure 170 C HAP T ER 37 Diagnostic 37.1 Diagnostic Overview Diagnostic 37.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup 37.2 What You Need to Know 802.1ag 802.3ah How CFM Works 37.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Ping&TraceRoute&NsLookup Figure 171 Maintenance > Diagnostic >

LABEL DESCRIPTION 37.4 802.1ag (CFM) Maintenance > Diagnostic 802.1ag Figure 172 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Y.1731 Y.1731 Y.1731 Enable Pass Fail CCM 37.5 802.3ah (OAM) Maintenance > Diagnostic 803.ah Figure 173 LABEL DESCRIPTION Variable Retrieval Link Events Remote Loopback Active Mode

PART III Troubleshooting and Appendices C HAP T ER 38 Troubleshooting 38.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs 38.2 Zyxel Device Access and Login Start > Run cmd ipconfig Default Gateway Login Maintenance > Remote Management Advanced Suggestions Login 38.3 Internet Access Start Guide Quick Network Setting > Broadband Network Setting > Broadband Network Setting > Interface Group LAN Setup Start Guide 38.4 Wireless Internet Access Quick 38.5 UPnP My Network Places > Local Network Local Area Connection A PPE NDI X A Customer Support https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml Required Information Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide) Asia Taiwan China India Kazakhstan Korea Malaysia Pakistan Philippines Singapore Taiwan Thailand Vietnam Belarus Belgium Europe Bulgaria Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Hungary Italy Latvia Lithuania Netherlands Norway Poland Romania Russia Slovakia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey UK Ukraine South America Argentina Brazil Colombia Ecuador South America Middle East Israel Middle East North America USA Oceania Australia Africa South Africa A PPE NDI X B IPv6 Overview IPv6 Addressing Prefix and Prefix Length Link-local Address Global Address Unspecified Address Loopback Address Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION MULTICAST ADDRESS MULTICAST ADDRESS Subnet Masking Interface ID EUI-64 MAC EUI-64 Identity Association S1 S2 DHCP Relay Agent Prefix Delegation ICMPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) IPv6 Cache Multicast Listener Discovery MLD Messages Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Start All Programs Dibbler-DHCPv6 Client Install as service Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Services Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client Start OK Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Control Panel Network and Sharing Center Local Area Connection Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) OK Close Local Area Connection Status Start All Programs Accessories Command Prompt A PPE NDI X C Services Name Protocol Port(s) Protocol Protocol TCP UDP TCP/UDP Protocol USER Description USER-DEFINED Port(s TCP/UDP NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION A PPE NDI X D Legal Information Copyright Disclaimer Regulatory Notice and Statement UNITED STATES of AMERICA FCC EMC Statement FCC Radiation Exposure Statement FCC Part 68 Statement CANADA Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada ICES Statement Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 Statement Industry Canada radiation exposure statement Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

EUROPEAN UNION Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive, RED) National Restrictions National Restrictions National Restrictions National Restrictions Notes:

List of national codes Safety Warnings Important Safety Instructions Environment Statement ErP (Energy-related Products) European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information About the Symbols Explanation of the Symbols Viewing Certifications Zyxel Limited Warranty Note Registration Open Source Licenses Index

IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Related Documentation support.zyxel.com Document Conventions Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Warnings and Notes Syntax Conventions

> Routing > DNS Route Network Setting DNS Route Icons Used in Figures bold Network Setting Routing Contents Overview Users Guide ......................................................................................................................................15 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................57 Troubleshooting and Appendices .................................................................................................275 Table of Contents Document Conventions ......................................................................................................................3 Contents Overview .............................................................................................................................4 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................6 Part I: Users Guide.......................................................................................... 15 Chapter 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device ...........................................................................................................16 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................22 Chapter 3 Quick Start Wizard..............................................................................................................................31 Chapter 4 Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................36 Part II: Technical Reference........................................................................... 57 Chapter 5 Connection Status..............................................................................................................................58 Chapter 6 Broadband..........................................................................................................................................71 Chapter 7 Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................85 Chapter 8 Home Networking ............................................................................................................................119 Chapter 9 Routing ..............................................................................................................................................139 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)..................................................................................................................147 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) ................................................................................................168 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup.........................................................................................................................185 Chapter 13 IGMP/MLD.........................................................................................................................................189 Chapter 14 VLAN Group......................................................................................................................................192 Chapter 15 Interface Grouping ..........................................................................................................................195 Chapter 16 Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................201 Chapter 17 MAC Filter .........................................................................................................................................210 Chapter 18 Parental Control ...............................................................................................................................212 Chapter 19 Scheduler Rule .................................................................................................................................218 Chapter 20 Certificates .......................................................................................................................................220 Chapter 21 Log ....................................................................................................................................................227 Chapter 22 Traffic Status .....................................................................................................................................230 Chapter 23 ARP Table ..........................................................................................................................................234 Chapter 24 Routing Table....................................................................................................................................236 Chapter 25 Multicast Status ...............................................................................................................................239 Chapter 26 WLAN Station Status .........................................................................................................................241 Chapter 27 System...............................................................................................................................................243 Chapter 28 User Account....................................................................................................................................244 Chapter 29 Remote Management .....................................................................................................................247 Chapter 30 SNMP .................................................................................................................................................251 Chapter 31 Time Settings.....................................................................................................................................254 Chapter 32 E-mail Notification ...........................................................................................................................257 Chapter 33 Log Setting .......................................................................................................................................260 Chapter 34 Firmware Upgrade ...........................................................................................................................264 Chapter 35 Backup/Restore ...............................................................................................................................267 Chapter 36 Diagnostic.........................................................................................................................................270 Part III: Troubleshooting and Appendices .................................................. 275 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................276 Index .................................................................................................................................................310 PART I Users Guide C HAP T ER 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device 1.1 Overview 1.1.1 Multi-Gigabit Ethernet CABLE TRANSMISSION SPEED MAXIMUM DISTANCE BANDWIDTH CAPACITY 1.2 Example Applications 1.2.1 Internet Access Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 4 1.3 Ways to Manage the Zyxel Device 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Zyxel Device 1.5 Hardware 1.5.1 Front Panel Figure 5 LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION 1.5.2 Rear Panel Figure 6 LABEL DESCRIPTION 1.5.3 WPS Button WPS POWER WPS WPS 1.5.4 RESET Button WPS RESET POWER POWER RESET POWER C HAP T ER 2 The Web Configurator 2.1 Overview 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator admin Login Login Figure 7 Maintenance User Account Add New Edit Account Password Password Skip Figure 8 Change password Wizard Wizard Connection Status Wizard Figure 9 2.2 Web Configurator Layout Figure 10 A B C X 2.2.1 Navigation Panel Figure 11 2.2.1.1 Configuration Menus LINK TAB FUNCTION LINK TAB FUNCTION Port Forwarding

Bulgaria Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Hungary Italy Latvia Lithuania Netherlands Norway Poland Romania Russia Slovakia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey UK Ukraine South America Argentina Brazil Colombia Ecuador South America Middle East Israel Middle East North America USA Oceania Australia Africa South Africa A PPE NDI X B IPv6 Overview IPv6 Addressing Prefix and Prefix Length Link-local Address Global Address Unspecified Address Loopback Address Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION MULTICAST ADDRESS MULTICAST ADDRESS Subnet Masking Interface ID EUI-64 MAC EUI-64 Identity Association S1 S2 DHCP Relay Agent Prefix Delegation ICMPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) IPv6 Cache Multicast Listener Discovery MLD Messages Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Start All Programs Dibbler-DHCPv6 Client Install as service Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Services Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client Start OK Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Control Panel Network and Sharing Center Local Area Connection Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) OK Close Local Area Connection Status Start All Programs Accessories Command Prompt A PPE NDI X C Services Name Protocol Port(s) Protocol Protocol TCP UDP TCP/UDP Protocol USER Description USER-DEFINED Port(s TCP/UDP NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION

NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION A PPE NDI X D Legal Information Copyright Disclaimer Regulatory Notice and Statement UNITED STATES of AMERICA FCC EMC Statement FCC Radiation Exposure Statement CANADA Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada ICES Statement Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 Statement Antenna Information NO. MODEL NAME TYPE MANUFACTURER GAIN CONNECTOR Informations Antenne NUMRO NOM DU MODLE TYPE FABRICANT GAIN CONNECTEUR Industry Canada radiation exposure statement Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

EUROPEAN UNION Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive, RED) National Restrictions National Restrictions National Restrictions National Restrictions Notes:

List of national codes Safety Warnings Important Safety Instructions Environment Statement ErP (Energy-related Products) European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information About the Symbols Explanation of the Symbols Viewing Certifications Zyxel Limited Warranty Note Registration Open Source Licenses Index

LINK TAB FUNCTION Maintenance Remote Management MGMT Services LINK TAB FUNCTION 2.2.1.2 Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Wizard Wizard Theme ICON DESCRIPTION Language Restart Logout C HAP T ER 3 Quick Start Wizard 3.1 Overview Wizard 3.2 Wizard Setup Wizard Wizard Wizard Wizard Lets Go Skip Wizard Figure 12 3.2.1 Time Zone Next Figure 13 3.2.2 Internet Next Figure 14 Skip Wizard Figure 15 Next Next Figure 16 Next Figure 17 Unsuccessful Internet Connection Next Figure 18 Incorrect Internet Information Next Figure 19 3.2.3 WiFi Keep 2.4G and 5G the same Done Wizard Figure 20 C HAP T ER 4 Tutorials 4.1 Overview 4.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network 4.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings SSID Security Mode Pre-Shared Key 802.11 Mode Network Setting Wireless WPA2-PSK Apply General More Secure Wireless > Others 802.11b/g/n/ax Mixed 802.11 Mode Apply 4.2.2 Using WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) PIN Configuration 2.4GHz 5GHz Push Button Configuration (PBC) Band Band WPS Network Setting > Wireless > WPS Apply Connect Figure 21 PIN Configuration WPS PIN Entry Apply Network Setting > Wireless > WPS Register Figure 22 4.2.3 Without WPS 4.3 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups Company VIP Guest COMPANY VIP GUEST SSID Security Level Security Mode Pre-Shared Key Network Setting > Wireless General Apply Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP Edit Apply Wireless Network Name Guest More AP Edit Apply VIP Guest Guest More AP 4.4 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network R N2 N2 B B R N1 A N1 N2 B R A R R DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS A R R B N1 N2 Network Setting Routing Add new Static Route Static Route Route Name R Active IP Type IPv4 N2 Destination IP Address 192.168.10.0 IP Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Use Gateway IP Address ETHWAN Use Interface 192.168.1.253 R Gateway IP Address OK B A B 4.5 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup Network Setting > QoS > General QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Apply Network Queue Setup Add new Queue Active Name Interface WAN Priority Weight Rate Limit Network QoS Classification Setup Active Add new Classification Enable Class Name From Interface Ether Type IP Address MAC Address To Queue Index IP E-mail LAN1 192.168.1.23 IP Subnet Mask AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF MAC Mask Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup E-mail E-mail IP Protocol Source 4.6 Access the Zyxel Device Using DDNS 4.6.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org http://www.dyndns.org UserName1 12345 zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Host with IP address Status 4.6.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Zyxel Device Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS Enable Dynamic DNS www.DynDNS.com zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Host Name UserName1 12345 Apply 4.6.3 Testing the DDNS Setting http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org a.b.c.d 4.7 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Security > MAC Filter Security MAC Filter MAC Filter Enable Allow Add a new setting Apply PART II Technical Reference C HAP T ER 5 Connection Status 5.1 Overview Figure 23 Connection Status 5.1.1 Layout Icon 5.1.2 Connectivity Figure 24 Figure 25 Icon and Device Name Figure 26 Device Name Save 5.1.3 System Info Figure 27 Figure 28 LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance > Reboot LABEL DESCRIPTION Release Renew Disconnect Connect Server Relay None 5.2 WiFi Settings Figure 29 Figure 30 Keep 2.4G and 5G the same LABEL DESCRIPTION 5.3 Guest WiFi Settings Figure 31 Random Password Random Password Password Save Network Setting Wireless WPS WiFi Figure 32 LABEL DESCRIPTION same WiFi Settings Guest WiFi Settings Keep 2.4G and 5G the Figure 33 LABEL DESCRIPTION Random Password Random Password Password Save Network Setting Wireless WPS WiFi 5.4 LAN Settings Figure 34 Figure 35 LABEL DESCRIPTION Save 5.5 Parental Control Figure 36 Figure 38 Control Add New PCP Edit Figure 37 Security Parental LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Edit Profile Device List 5.5.1 Create/Edit a Parental Control Profile Add more Profile Edit Figure 39 LABEL DESCRIPTION 5.5.2 Define a Schedule Next Figure 40 LABEL DESCRIPTION Whole Week Back Save

C HAP T ER 6 Broadband 6.1 Overview Broadband Figure 41 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Broadband LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION CONNECTION MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS 6.1.2 What You Need to Know WAN IP Address IPv6 Introduction IPv6 Addressing IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length IPv6 Subnet Masking IPv6 Rapid Deployment IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv4 Only Figure 42 Dual Stack Lite IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv6 Only Figure 43 6.1.3 Before You Begin 6.2 Broadband Settings Network Setting Broadband Figure 44 LABEL DESCRIPTION N/A N/A Edit Delete 6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection Add New WAN Interface Broadband Routing Mode Routing Routing PPPoE Figure 45 LABEL DESCRIPTION Routing PPPoE IPoE IPv4 Only IPv6 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack Routing Mode Routing Mode password unmask Auto Connect On Demand Auto Connect PPP Connection Trigger PPPoE IPv4 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv4/IPv6 Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Encapsulation IPoE Encapsulation IPoE IPv4 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv4/IPv6 Mode Obtain DNS Info Automically Use Following Static DNS Address IPv4 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv4/IPv6 Mode NAT Encapsulation IPoE IPv4 Only IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv4/IPv6 Mode Option 43 Option 121 LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IPv6 Address Automatically IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode Static IPv6 Address IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode Obtain IPv6 DNS Info Automatically Use Following Static IPv6 DNS Address IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode Only IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv4 LABEL DESCRIPTION Manually Configured Automatically configured by DHCPC Automatically configured by DHCPC IPoE Manually Configured IPv4 IPv6 DualStack IPv6 Only IPv4/IPv6 Mode Factory Default Cancel Apply Bridge Mode Add new WAN Interface Network Setting > Broadband Edit Bridge Figure 46 LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Bridge Factory Default LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 6.3 Technical Reference Encapsulation IP over Ethernet PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) IP Address Assignment Introduction to VLANs Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Multicast DNS Server Address Assignment IPv6 Addressing IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length C HAP T ER 7 Wireless 7.1 Wireless Overview Network Setting > Wireless 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Wireless General Guest/More AP MAC Authentication WPS WMM Others Channel Status EasyMesh 7.1.2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics 7.2 Wireless General Settings PSK More Secure WPA2-

WiFi6 / IEEE 802.11ax Finding Out More Apply Network Setting Wireless General Figure 47 LABEL DESCRIPTION Keep the same settings for 2.4G and 5G wireless networks 5GHz 2.4GHz Auto 40/80MHz 20/40/80MHz 5GHz Band 20MHz 40MHz, 20/40MHz 20/

20MHz 40MHz Lower 20/40MHz Upper Bandwidth Channel WPS Network Setting Wireless LABEL DESCRIPTION More Secure (Recommended) No Security Cancel Apply 7.2.1 No Security No Security Figure 48 LABEL DESCRIPTION No Security 7.2.2 More Secure (Recommended) Network Setting Wireless General More Secure WPA2-PSK WPA2-EAP Security Mode Figure 49 LABEL DESCRIPTION More Secure WPA2-PSK WPA2-EAP Generate password automatically Password WPA2-EAP Security Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION AES WPA2-EAP Security Mode WPA2-EAP Security Mode Timer 7.3 Guest/More AP Network Setting > Wireless Guest/More AP WIRELESS NETWORKS WHERE TO CONFIGURE Figure 50 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Home Guest External Guest N/A Edit 7.3.1 Edit Guest/More AP Settings Edit Guest/More AP Figure 51 LABEL DESCRIPTION Scenario Home Guest External Guest Access Enable Keep the same settings for 2.4G and 5G wireless networks Network Setting Wireless > General Network Setting Wireless WPS More Secure (Recommended) No Security WPA2-PSK WPA2-EAP

LABEL DESCRIPTION Generate password automatically AES WPA2-EAP Security Mode WPA2-EAP Security Mode Timer Cancel OK 7.4 MAC Authentication

(Deny)

(Allow) Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication Figure 52 MAC Address Deny Allow MAC Restrict Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Disable Deny Allow Edit Delete Cancel Apply 7.4.1 Add/Edit MAC Addresses Add new MAC address Network Setting Wireless MAC Authentication Figure 53 7.5 WPS Settings PBC SSID1 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS Apply Figure 54 LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply WPS Apply LABEL DESCRIPTION Register Apply Generate New PIN Cancel Apply 7.6 WMM Settings Network Setting > Wireless > WMM Figure 55 WMM WMM Automatic Power Save APSD WMM APSD WMM LABEL DESCRIPTION On 802.11 Mode Network Setting > Wireless > Others Cancel Apply 7.7 Others Settings Network Setting > Wireless > Others Figure 56 LABEL DESCRIPTION 60% 80% 100%

20% 40%

LABEL DESCRIPTION 802.11b Only 802.11g Only 802.11n Only 802.11b/g Mixed 802.11b/g/n Mixed 802.11b/g/n/ax Mixed 802.11a Only 802.11n Only 802.11ac Only 802.11a/n Mixed 802.11n/ac Mixed 802.11a/n/ac Mixed 802.11a/n/ac/ax Mixed Auto Off Disable Capable Required Cancel Apply Off 802.11 Mode 802.11b Only Long Short Network Setting > Wireless > General 802.11 Mode 802.11b 802.11b/g Mixed WPA2-PSK Security Mode AES 7.8 Channel Status Settings Channel Status Wireless > Channel Status Channel Scan Result Scan Network Setting >

Figure 57 7.9 EasyMesh Settings Configurations on a Multy Pro-Supported Extender(s) Configurations on the Zyxel Device Network > Wireless > EasyMesh WPS Add Extender Figure 58 Network > Wireless > EasyMesh Figure 59 LABEL DESCRIPTION Keep the same settings for 2.4G and 5G wireless networks Network Setting >

Network Setting > Wireless > WPS Wireless > General WPS Apply Cancel Figure 60 7.10 Technical Reference 7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview Figure 61 Radio Channels AP A B 7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION 7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview 7.10.3.1 SSID 7.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter 7.10.3.3 User Authentication 7.10.3.4 Encryption 7.10.4 Signal Problems 7.10.5 BSS Figure 62 7.10.6 MBSSID 7.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs 7.10.7 Preamble Type 7.10.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) 7.10.8.1 Push Button Configuration 7.10.8.2 PIN Configuration Figure 63 7.10.8.3 How WPS Works Figure 64 7.10.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup Client 1 1 AP1 Client 1 AP1 Figure 65 2 AP1 Client 2 Figure 66 Client 1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP2 AP2 AP1 Client 2 Figure 67 7.10.8.5 Limitations of WPS C HAP T ER 8 Home Networking 8.1 Home Networking Overview Figure 68 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter LAN Setup Static DHCP UPnP Additional Subnet STB Vendor ID Wake on LAN TFTP Server Name 8.1.2 What You Need To Know 8.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP DNS RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) 8.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices NAT Traversal Cautions with UPnP

UPnP and Zyxel Finding Out More 8.1.3 Before You Begin 8.2 LAN Setup Networking LAN Setup Network Setting > Home IP Address IP Subnet Mask Apply Figure 69 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Standard Mode Blocking Mode Enable Disable DHCP Relay DNS Proxy Static DHCP Relay DHCP Enable DHCP Enable DHCP Enable DHCP From ISP LABEL DESCRIPTION Standard Mode Blocking Mode Stateless Stateful From Router Advertisement From DHCPv6 Server From RA & DHCPv6 Server DHCPv6 Server Stateful LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION From ISP User-Defined None IPv4/IPv6 DNS Server IPv6 DNS Server Only IPv4 DNS Server Only IPv6 DNS Server First IPv4 DNS Server First Cancel Apply 8.3 LAN Static DHCP Networking > Static DHCP Figure 70 Network Setting > Home LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete Static DHCP Configuration Static DHCP Edit Figure 71 LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 LABEL DESCRIPTION Manual Input Manual Input Manual Input Cancel OK 8.4 UPnP Settings UPnP NAT-T NAT Network Setting Broadband Edit Add New Network Setting >

Home Networking > UPnP WAN Interface Figure 72 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.4.1 Turning on UPnP in Windows 7 Example Network Setting Home Networking UPnP Control Panel Network and Sharing Center. Change Advanced Sharing Settings Turn on network discovery Save Changes 8.4.2 Turning on UPnP in Windows 10 Example Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP Settings Network & Internet Network and Sharing Center Change advanced sharing settings Domain Turn on network discovery Save Changes 8.5 LAN Additional Subnet Public LAN Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet Figure 73 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.6 STB Vendor ID Network Setting Home Networking STB Vendor ID Figure 74 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.7 Wake on LAN Network Setting Home Networking Wake on LAN Figure 75 LABEL DESCRIPTION Manual MAC Address Wake by Address 8.8 TFTP Server Name TFTP Server Name Network Setting Home Networking TFTP Server Name Figure 76 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.9 Technical Reference 8.9.1 LANs, WANs and the Zyxel Device Figure 77 8.9.2 DHCP Setup IP Pool Setup 8.9.3 DNS Server Addresses 8.9.4 LAN TCP/IP IP Address and Subnet Mask DNS Server DHCP Setup DHCP Setup Private IP Addresses C HAP T ER 9 Routing A A R1 R2 R3 9.1 Overview Figure 78 9.2 Static Route Settings Network Setting > Routing > Static Route Figure 79 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Add new static route Routing Edit Gateway IP Address Interface Use Figure 80 LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 IPv6 Cancel Apply 9.3 DNS Route Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route Figure 81 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 9.3.1 Add DNS Route Setting > Routing > DNS Route Add New DNS Route Network Figure 82 LABEL DESCRIPTION ETHWAN 9.4 Policy Route Setting > Routing > Policy Route Policy Route Figure 83 Network LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Route Add New Policy Route Policy Route Edit Figure 84 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ETHWAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 9.5 RIP Settings Network Setting > Routing > RIP RIP Figure 85 2 1 1 LABEL DESCRIPTION Passive Active Cancel Apply C HAP T ER 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.1 QoS Overview 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter General Queue Setup Classification Setup Shaper Setup Policer Setup Monitor 10.2 What You Need to Know QoS versus CoS Tagging and Marking Traffic Shaping Traffic Policing 10.3 Quality of Service General Settings Network Setting > QoS > General WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Upstream Traffic Priority Upstream Traffic Priority Upstream Traffic Priority Assigned by QoS None Figure 86 LABEL DESCRIPTION

LABEL DESCRIPTION None:

Ethernet Priority:

IP Precedence:

Packet Length:

Cancel Apply 10.4 Queue Setup Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup Priority Figure 87 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Add New Queue Edit Queue Setup Figure 88 LABEL DESCRIPTION Drop Tail (DT) Drop Tail (DT) Cancel OK 10.5 QoS Classification Setup Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup Figure 89 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Add New Classification Classification Setup Edit Figure 90 From LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Last Interface IP 802.1Q TCP UDP IP Protocol TCP UDP IP Protocol LABEL DESCRIPTION User defined TCP UDP ICMP IGMP Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60) Client ID (DHCP Option 61) User Class ID (DHCP Option 77) Vendor Specific Info (DHCP Option 125) IP Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type 802.1Q Ether Type 802.1Q Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type Remark Unchange Remark Remove Add Unchange Queue Setup Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Unchange Unchange Cancel OK 10.6 QoS Shaper Setup Figure 91 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Shaper Add New Shaper Shaper Setup Edit Figure 92 LABEL DESCRIPTION ETHWAN Cancel OK 10.7 QoS Policer Setup

> QoS > Policer Setup Figure 93 Network Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.7.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer Add New Policer Policer Setup Edit Figure 94 LABEL DESCRIPTION Simple Token Bucket Single Rate Three Color Marker Two Rate Three Color Marker b LABEL DESCRIPTION Single Rate Three Color Meter Type Two Rate Three Color Meter Type Two Rate Three Color Meter Type Single Two Rate Three Color Meter Type Available Class

Selected Class

Pass:

DSCP Mark:

Pass Drop DSCP Mark Drop:

DSCP Mark:

Selected Class Cancel OK 10.8 QoS Monitor Network Setting QoS Monitor Figure 95 LABEL DESCRIPTION None 10.9 Technical Reference IEEE 802.1Q Tag PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE DiffServ DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior IP Precedence Automatic Priority Queue Assignment LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY QUEUE IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY (ETHERNET PRIORITY) TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH

(BYTE) Token Bucket b b C HAP T ER 11 Network Address Translation

(NAT) 11.1 NAT Overview 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 11.1.2 What You Need To Know Port Forwarding Port Triggering DMZ ALG Sessions Address Mapping Inside/Outside Global/Local NAT Port Forwarding Finding Out More 11.2 Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) B A C Figure 96 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding Figure 97 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete TCP UDP TCP/UDP 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding Add New Rule Port Forwarding Edit Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port Start Start Port Figure 98 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Obtain WAN IP Automatically LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Start Port Enable Cancel OK 11.3 Port Triggering Obtain WAN IP Automatically End Port End Start Port TCP UDP TCP/UDP Figure 99 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering Figure 100 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 11.3.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule Edit Add new rule Port Triggering Figure 101 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Disable TCP UDP TCP/UDP TCP UDP TCP/UDP Cancel OK 11.4 DMZ Settings

Apply Address Figure 102 Apply Default Server Address Default Server LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT Port Forwarding Default Server Address NAT Port Forwarding Cancel Apply 11.5 ALG Settings Setting > NAT > ALG Network Figure 103 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 11.6 Address Mapping Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping Figure 104 One-to-One Many-to-One One-to-One Many-to-

LABEL DESCRIPTION One One-to-One Many-to-One Many-to-Many Edit Delete 11.6.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule Mapping Add new rule Address Figure 105 LABEL DESCRIPTION One-to-One Many-to-One Many-to-Many One Cancel OK 11.7 NAT Sessions One-to-One Many-to-One One-to-One Many-to-

Setting > NAT > Sessions Apply Figure 106 Network MAX NAT Session Per Host MAX NAT Session Per Host Apply LABEL DESCRIPTION 11.8 Technical Reference 11.8.1 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION 11.8.2 What NAT Does Address Translator (NAT) 11.8.3 How NAT Works RFC 1631 The IP Network Figure 107 11.8.4 NAT Application Figure 108 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER Port Forwarding Example B Figure 109 A C C HAP T ER 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.1 DNS Overview DNS Broadband Dynamic DNS 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter DNS Entry Dynamic DNS 12.1.2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard DNS DNS Entry Network Setting >

12.2 DNS Entry Figure 110 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry Entry DNS Entry Edit Add New DNS Figure 111 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 12.3 Dynamic DNS Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS Figure 112 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Success Cancel Apply C HAP T ER 13 IGMP/MLD 13.1 IGMP/MLD Overview IGMP/MLD 13.1.1 What You Need To Know Multicast and IGMP Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) IGMP Fast Leave 13.2 IGMP/MLD Settings Network Setting > IGMP/MLD Figure 113 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply C HAP T ER 14 VLAN Group 14.1 Overview Figure 114 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 14.2 VLAN Group Settings Figure 115 Network Setting > VLAN Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 14.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group Add New VLAN Group VLAN Group Figure 116 LABEL DESCRIPTION TX Tagging Include TX Tagging Cancel OK VLAN ID C HAP T ER 15 Interface Grouping 15.1 Interface Grouping Overview 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Interface Grouping 15.2 Interface Grouping Setup LAN Setup Figure 117 Network Setting > Interface Grouping Figure 118 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration Add New Interface Group Interface Grouping Figure 119 LABEL DESCRIPTION None Interfaces Selected LAN Interfaces Available LAN Selected LAN Interfaces LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Edit Delete Cancel OK Figure 120 15.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria Add Interface Grouping Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Setting > VLAN Group Cancel OK C HAP T ER 16 Firewall 16.1 Firewall Overview A Figure 121 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter General Protocol Access Control DoS 16.1.2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack DoS DDoS LAND Attack Ping of Death SPI 16.2 Firewall Settings High Security > Firewall General Figure 122 LABEL DESCRIPTION Low Medium High Cancel Apply 16.3 Protocol Settings Protocol Security > Firewall > Protocol Figure 123 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP TCP/UDP Other Edit Delete 16.3.1 Add New/Edit Protocol Entry Add New Protocol Entry Edit Protocol Figure 124 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP ICMPv6 Other Other Other TCP UDP TCP UDP ICMPv6 Any Single Any Single Range Range Cancel OK 16.4 Access Control Security > Firewall > Access Control Figure 125 LABEL DESCRIPTION Any Any ACCEPT Edit Delete Move To DROP REJECT 16.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule Add new ACL rule Edit Access Control Figure 126 LABEL DESCRIPTION Specific IP Address Specific IP Address LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 IPv6 Security > Firewall > Protocol > Add Specific Service Specific Service Select Service TCP/UDP TCP UDP ICMP ICMPv6 UDP Protocol UDP Protocol Protocol RST FIN Specific Service Select Service Specific Service Select Service TCP TCP Specific Service Select Service TCP SYN ACK URG PSH Specific Service Select Service ICMPv6 DROP REJECT ACCEPT Add New Rule Security > Scheduler Rules Cancel OK 16.5 DoS Settings DoS Security > Firewall > DoS Figure 127 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Cancel Apply C HAP T ER 17 MAC Filter 17.1 MAC Filter Overview MAC Filter 17.2 MAC Filter Settings MAC Address Filter Figure 128 Security MAC Filter Active

Figure 129 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Allow Deny Delete Cancel Apply Active Allow C HAP T ER 18 Parental Control 18.1 Parental Control Overview 18.2 Parental Control Settings Security Parental Control Figure 130 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable LABEL DESCRIPTION None None Edit Delete Cancel Apply 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile Add new PCP Parental Control Edit Figure 131 Figure 132 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Disable Custom All Home Network User Custom Add Delete Authorized access No access Block Allow Service Name Protocol Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Block the Web URLs Allow the Web URLs Edit Delete Add Edit Delete Cancel OK Figure 134 User Define TCP UDP TCP & UDP Service Name Service Name LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK Security Parental Control Add New PCP Add Figure 135 LABEL DESCRIPTION OK Cancel OK C HAP T ER 19 Scheduler Rule 19.1 Scheduler Rule Overview 19.2 Scheduler Rule Settings Security > Scheduler Rule Figure 136 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 19.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule Rule Add New Rule Scheduler Rule Edit Figure 137 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK C HAP T ER 20 Certificates 20.1 Certificates Overview 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Local Certificates Trusted CA 20.2 What You Need to Know Certification Authority 20.3 Local Certificates Security > Certificates Local Certificates Figure 138 LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Choose File Not Yet Valid!

Expiring!

Expired!

View Load Signed Remove 20.3.1 Create Certificate Request Security Certificates Local Certificates Create Certificate Request Figure 139 LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Customize Cancel OK 20.3.2 View Certificate Request View Local Certificates Private Key Certificate Figure 140 LABEL DESCRIPTION ca LABEL DESCRIPTION Back 20.4 Trusted CA Security > Certificates > Trusted CA Figure 141 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION ca View Remove 20.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate View Trusted CA Figure 142 LABEL DESCRIPTION Back 20.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Import Certificate Trusted CA Figure 143 LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Choose File Cancel OK C HAP T ER 21 Log System Errors View Log 21.1 Log Overview 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter System Log Security Log 21.1.2 What You Need To Know Alerts and Logs Syslog Overview CODE SEVERITY System Monitor > Log System Log System Log CODE SEVERITY 21.2 System Log System Log Figure 144 LABEL DESCRIPTION Notification Maintenance > E-mail System Monitor > Log > Security Log 21.3 Security Log Security Log Figure 145 LABEL DESCRIPTION Notification Maintenance > E-mail C HAP T ER 22 Traffic Status 22.1 Traffic Status Overview 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Traffic Status WAN LAN NAT 22.2 WAN Status System Monitor > Traffic Status WAN Figure 146 LABEL DESCRIPTION 22.3 LAN Status System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN Figure 147 LABEL DESCRIPTION 22.4 NAT Status System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT Figure 148 LABEL DESCRIPTION C HAP T ER 23 ARP Table 23.1 ARP Table Overview 23.1.1 How ARP Works 23.2 ARP Table Settings System Monitor ARP Table Figure 149 LABEL DESCRIPTION C HAP T ER 24 Routing Table 24.1 Routing Table Overview 24.2 Routing Table Settings System Monitor Routing Table Figure 150 LABEL DESCRIPTION U-Up:

!-Reject:

G-Gateway:

H-Host:

R-Reinstate:

D-Dynamic (redirect):

M-Modified (redirect):

LABEL DESCRIPTION brx ethx ppp0 wlx wl0 wl0 wl1 wl1 C HAP T ER 25 Multicast Status 25.1 Multicast Status Overview Multicast Status 25.2 IGMP Status System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status Figure 151 LABEL DESCRIPTION INCLUDE EXCLUDE Source List Source List 25.3 MLD Status Network Setting > IGMP/MLD System Monitor > Multicast Status > MLD Status Figure 152 LABEL DESCRIPTION INCLUDE EXCLUDE Source List Source List C HAP T ER 26 WLAN Station Status 26.1 WLAN Station Status Overview System Monitor > WLAN Station Status Figure 153 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION 5 4 3 2 1 C HAP T ER 27 System 27.1 System Overview System 27.2 System Settings Maintenance > System Figure 154 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply C HAP T ER 28 User Account 28.1 User Account Overview User Account 28.2 User Account Settings Maintenance > User Account Figure 155 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete Cancel Apply 28.2.1 User Account Add/Edit Add New Account Edit Figure 156 Administrator User Retry Times Maintenance > User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Disable User Name Password LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator Wizard Network Setting Security Maintenance System Maintenance SNMP Cancel OK Administrator User Administrator User Retry Times C HAP T ER 29 Remote Management 29.1 Remote Management Overview 29.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter MGMT Services Trust Domain 29.2 MGMT Services Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services Figure 157 LABEL DESCRIPTION Any_WAN Multi_WAN HTTP HTTPS FTP TELNET SSH SNMP PING Enable Enable Enable Domain Maintenance > Remote MGMT > Trust Trust Domain WAN Trust Domain

LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 29.3 Trust Domain Figure 158 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services Maintenance Remote Management > Trust Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete 29.3.1 Add Trust Domain Add Trust Domain Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain Figure 159 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK C HAP T ER 30 SNMP 30.1 SNMP Overview Figure 160 30.2 SNMP Settings Maintenance > SNMP Figure 161 LABEL DESCRIPTION Get Community Set Community Trap Community Apply Cancel C HAP T ER 31 Time Settings 31.1 Time Settings Overview 31.2 Time Maintenance Time Figure 162 LABEL DESCRIPTION Other None Hour Hour Hour Hour Cancel Apply Second Sunday March 2 March o'clock 2 Hour Last Sunday First Sunday November 2 October o'clock Hour 2 Last Sunday C HAP T ER 32 E-mail Notification 32.1 E-mail Notification Overview 32.2 E-mail Notification Settings Maintenance > E-mail Notification E-mail Notification Figure 163 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION 32.2.1 E-mail Notification Edit Add E-mail Notification Figure 164 LABEL DESCRIPTION Account e-mail Address Account e-mail Address SSL STARTTLS LABEL DESCRIPTION C HAP T ER 33 Log Setting 33.1 Logs Setting Overview Logs Setting 33.2 Log Settings Maintenance > Log Setting Syslog Logging Remote Local File and Remote Mode Local File Local File and Syslog Server Remote Remote Figure 165 LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote Local File Local File and Remote LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance > E-mail Notification Cancel Apply 33.2.1 Example E-mail Log Figure 166 C HAP T ER 34 Firmware Upgrade 34.1 Firmware Upgrade Overview Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Zyxel Device. 34.2 Firmware Upgrade Settings Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade Do NOT turn off the Zyxel Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 167 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Figure 168 Upgrade Figure 169 Status OK Firmware C HAP T ER 35 Backup/Restore 35.1 Backup/Restore Overview Backup/Restore 35.2 Backup/Restore Settings Maintenance > Backup/Restore Figure 170 Backup Configuration Backup Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Do NOT turn off the Zyxel Device while configuration file upload is in progress. OK Backup/

Figure 171 Restore Figure 172 Reset to Factory Defaults Reset Figure 173 Figure 174 RESET RESET 35.3 Reboot Maintenance > Reboot Reboot Figure 175 C HAP T ER 36 Diagnostic 36.1 Diagnostic Overview Diagnostic 36.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup 36.2 What You Need to Know 802.1ag 802.3ah How CFM Works 36.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Ping&TraceRoute&NsLookup Figure 176 Maintenance > Diagnostic >

LABEL DESCRIPTION 36.4 802.1ag (CFM) Maintenance > Diagnostic 802.1ag Figure 177 LABEL DESCRIPTION LABEL DESCRIPTION Y.1731 Y.1731 Y.1731 Enable Pass Fail CCM 36.5 802.3ah (OAM) Maintenance > Diagnostic 803.ah Figure 178 LABEL DESCRIPTION Variable Retrieval Link Events Remote Loopback Active Mode PART III Troubleshooting and Appendices C HAP T ER 37 Troubleshooting 37.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs 37.2 Zyxel Device Access and Login Start > Run cmd ipconfig Default Gateway Login Maintenance > Remote Management Advanced Suggestions Login Login screen in the Web Configurator. Login screen in the Web Configurator. 37.3 Internet Access Start Guide Quick Network Setting > Broadband Network Setting Broadband Network Setting Interface Group Network Setting Home Networking LAN Setup Start Guide Quick 37.4 Wireless Internet Access 37.5 UPnP My Network Places > Local Network Local Area Connection 37.6 IP Address Setup Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center Change adapter settings Ethernet Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Use the following IP address IP address 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.254 Subnet mask OK A PPE NDI X A Customer Support https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml Required Information Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide) Asia Taiwan China India Kazakhstan Korea Malaysia Pakistan Philippines Singapore Taiwan Thailand Vietnam Belarus Belgium Europe

Users Guide PX7511-B0 Wireless AX 10G PON Gateway with VoIP Default Login Details LAN IP Address Login Password http://192.168.1.1 admin See the device label Version 5.15 Edition 1, 10/2019 Copyright 2019 Zyxel Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from what you see due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide More Information The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Zyxel Device. Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 2 Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions The PX7511-B0 in this users guide may be referred to as the Zyxel Device in this guide. Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Network Setting

> Routing > DNS Route means you first click Network Setting in the navigation panel, then the Routing sub menu and finally the DNS Route tab to get to that screen. Icons Used in Figures Figures in this user guide may use the following generic icons. The Zyxel Device icon is not an exact representation of your device. Zyxel Device Wireless Device Laptop Computer Switch Firewall Server Internet User Smartphone PX7511-B0 Users Guide 3 Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide ......................................................................................................................................16 Introducing the Zyxel Device .............................................................................................................. 17 The Web Configurator ......................................................................................................................... 24 Quick Start Wizard ................................................................................................................................ 32 Tutorials .................................................................................................................................................. 37 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................59 Connection Status ................................................................................................................................ 60 Broadband ............................................................................................................................................ 74 Wireless ................................................................................................................................................... 88 Home Networking ............................................................................................................................... 117 Routing ................................................................................................................................................. 137 Quality of Service (QoS) .................................................................................................................... 145 Network Address Translation (NAT) ................................................................................................... 165 Dynamic DNS Setup ........................................................................................................................... 182 IGMP/MLD ........................................................................................................................................... 186 VLAN Group ........................................................................................................................................ 189 Interface Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 192 Firewall ................................................................................................................................................. 198 MAC Filter ............................................................................................................................................ 207 Parental Control ................................................................................................................................. 209 Scheduler Rule .................................................................................................................................... 215 Certificates .......................................................................................................................................... 217 VoIP ...................................................................................................................................................... 224 Log ....................................................................................................................................................... 254 Traffic Status ....................................................................................................................................... 257 VoIP Status ........................................................................................................................................... 261 ARP Table ............................................................................................................................................ 264 Routing Table ...................................................................................................................................... 266 Multicast Status .................................................................................................................................. 269 WLAN Station Status ........................................................................................................................... 271 xPON Status ......................................................................................................................................... 273 System .................................................................................................................................................. 274 User Account ...................................................................................................................................... 275 Remote Management ....................................................................................................................... 278 SNMP .................................................................................................................................................... 281 Time Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 284 Email Notification ................................................................................................................................ 287 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 4 Contents Overview Log Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 290 Firmware Upgrade .............................................................................................................................. 294 Backup and Restore ........................................................................................................................... 296 Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................................... 299 GPON ................................................................................................................................................... 301 Troubleshooting and Appendices .................................................................................................302 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 303 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 5 Table of Contents Table of Contents Document Conventions ......................................................................................................................3 Contents Overview .............................................................................................................................4 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................6 Part I: Users Guide.......................................................................................... 16 Chapter 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device ...........................................................................................................17 1.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 17 1.1.1 Multi-Gigabit .......................................................................................................................... 17 1.2 Example Applications .................................................................................................................... 17 1.2.1 Internet Access ...................................................................................................................... 18 1.2.2 Dual-Band WiFi ...................................................................................................................... 18 1.2.3 VoIP Application ................................................................................................................... 19 1.3 Ways to Manage the Zyxel Device .............................................................................................. 19 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Zyxel Device ............................................................................. 19 1.5 Hardware ......................................................................................................................................... 20 1.5.1 Front Panel ............................................................................................................................. 20 1.5.2 Rear Panel .............................................................................................................................. 21 1.5.3 The WPS Button ...................................................................................................................... 22 1.5.4 The RESET Button .................................................................................................................... 23 1.5.5 The UPS Port ........................................................................................................................... 23 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................24 2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 24 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ....................................................................................... 24 2.2 Web Configurator Layout .............................................................................................................. 26 2.2.1 Navigation Panel .................................................................................................................. 27 Chapter 3 Quick Start Wizard..............................................................................................................................32 3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 32 3.2 Wizard Setup ................................................................................................................................... 32 3.2.1 Time Zone ............................................................................................................................... 32 3.2.2 Internet ................................................................................................................................... 33 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 6 Table of Contents 3.2.3 WiFi .......................................................................................................................................... 35 Chapter 4 Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................37 4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 37 4.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .......................................................................................... 37 4.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings ......................................................................... 37 4.2.2 Using WPS ............................................................................................................................... 39 4.2.3 Without WPS ........................................................................................................................... 43 4.3 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups ............................................................................................. 44 4.4 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ........................................................ 49 4.5 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ................................................................................... 51 4.6 Access the Zyxel Device Using DDNS ........................................................................................... 55 4.6.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ........................................................... 55 4.6.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Zyxel Device ............................................................................ 56 4.6.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ...................................................................................................... 56 4.7 Configuring the MAC Address Filter ............................................................................................. 57 Part II: Technical Reference........................................................................... 59 Chapter 5 Connection Status..............................................................................................................................60 5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 60 5.1.1 Layout Icon ............................................................................................................................ 61 5.1.2 Connectivity .......................................................................................................................... 61 5.1.3 System Info ............................................................................................................................. 62 5.2 WiFi Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 65 5.3 Guest WiFi Settings .......................................................................................................................... 67 5.4 LAN Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 68 5.5 Parental Control ............................................................................................................................. 70 5.5.1 Create/Edit a Parental Control Profile ................................................................................ 71 5.5.2 Define a Schedule ................................................................................................................ 72 Chapter 6 Broadband..........................................................................................................................................74 6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 74 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 74 6.1.2 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................... 74 6.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................................... 77 6.2 Broadband Settings ........................................................................................................................ 77 6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ............................................................................................. 78 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 7 Table of Contents 6.3 Technical Reference ...................................................................................................................... 84 Chapter 7 Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................88 7.1 Wireless Overview ........................................................................................................................... 88 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 88 7.1.2 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................... 88 7.2 Wireless General Settings ............................................................................................................... 89 7.2.1 No Security ............................................................................................................................. 92 7.2.2 More Secure (Recommended) ........................................................................................... 92 7.3 Guest/More AP ............................................................................................................................... 94 7.3.1 The Edit Guest/More AP Screen ......................................................................................... 94 7.4 MAC Authentication ...................................................................................................................... 97 7.4.1 Add/Edit MAC Addresses .................................................................................................... 98 7.5 WPS Settings .................................................................................................................................... 99 7.6 WMM Settings ................................................................................................................................ 100 7.7 Others Settings .............................................................................................................................. 101 7.8 Channel Status Settings .............................................................. 104 7.9 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................... 104 7.9.1 Wireless Network Overview ................................................................................................ 104 7.9.2 Additional Wireless Terms ................................................................................................... 106 7.9.3 Wireless Security Overview ................................................................................................. 106 7.9.4 Signal Problems ................................................................................................................... 108 7.9.5 BSS ......................................................................................................................................... 108 7.9.6 MBSSID .................................................................................................................................. 109 7.9.7 Preamble Type .................................................................................................................... 109 7.9.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ............................................................................................... 110 Chapter 8 Home Networking ............................................................................................................................117 8.1 Home Networking Overview ....................................................................................................... 117 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..................................................................................... 117 8.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................... 117 8.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................................. 119 8.2 LAN Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 119 8.3 LAN Static DHCP ........................................................................................................................... 123 8.4 UPnP Settings ................................................................................................................................. 125 8.4.1 Turning on UPnP in Windows 7 Example ........................................................................... 126 8.4.2 Turning on UPnP in Windows 10 Example ......................................................................... 128 8.5 LAN Additional Subnet ................................................................................................................. 130 8.6 STB Vendor ID ................................................................................................................................ 132 8.7 Wake on LAN ................................................................................................................................ 133 8.8 TFTP Server Name ......................................................................................................................... 133 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 8 Table of Contents 8.9 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................... 134 8.9.1 LANs, WANs and the Zyxel Device .................................................................................... 134 8.9.2 DHCP Setup ......................................................................................................................... 135 8.9.3 DNS Server Addresses ......................................................................................................... 135 8.9.4 LAN TCP/IP ........................................................................................................................... 135 Chapter 9 Routing ..............................................................................................................................................137 9.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 137 9.2 Static Route Settings ..................................................................................................................... 137 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route ......................................................................................................... 138 9.3 DNS Route ...................................................................................................................................... 140 9.3.1 Add DNS Route ................................................................................................................... 140 9.4 Policy Route .................................................................................................................................. 141 9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Route ........................................................................................................ 143 9.5 RIP Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 144 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)..................................................................................................................145 10.1 QoS Overview ............................................................................................................................. 145 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 145 10.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................................... 146 10.3 Quality of Service General Settings .......................................................................................... 147 10.4 Queue Setup ............................................................................................................................... 149 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ....................................................................................................... 150 10.5 QoS Classification Setup ............................................................................................................ 151 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ........................................................................................................... 152 10.6 QoS Shaper Setup ...................................................................................................................... 156 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Shaper .................................................................................................... 157 10.7 QoS Policer Setup ....................................................................................................................... 157 10.7.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer .................................................................................................... 158 10.8 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 160 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) ................................................................................................165 11.1 NAT Overview ............................................................................................................................. 165 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 165 11.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 165 11.2 Port Forwarding ........................................................................................................................... 166 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding ................................................................................................ 168 11.3 Port Triggering ............................................................................................................................. 170 11.3.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule ........................................................................................... 172 11.4 DMZ Settings ................................................................................................................................ 173 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 9 Table of Contents 11.5 ALG Settings ................................................................................................................................ 174 11.6 Address Mapping ....................................................................................................................... 175 11.6.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule ..................................................................................... 176 11.7 NAT Sessions ................................................................................................................................ 177 11.8 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 178 11.8.1 NAT Definitions ................................................................................................................... 178 11.8.2 What NAT Does ................................................................................................................. 179 11.8.3 How NAT Works .................................................................................................................. 179 11.8.4 NAT Application ................................................................................................................ 180 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup.........................................................................................................................182 12.1 DNS Overview ............................................................................................................................. 182 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 182 12.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 182 12.2 DNS Entry ..................................................................................................................................... 183 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry ........................................................................................................... 183 12.3 Dynamic DNS .............................................................................................................................. 184 Chapter 13 IGMP/MLD.........................................................................................................................................186 13.1 IGMP/MLD Overview .................................................................................................................. 186 13.1.1 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 186 13.2 IGMP/MLD Settings ..................................................................................................................... 186 Chapter 14 VLAN Group......................................................................................................................................189 14.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 189 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 189 14.2 The VLAN Group Screen ............................................................................................................ 190 14.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group ................................................................................................... 190 Chapter 15 Interface Grouping ..........................................................................................................................192 15.1 Interface Grouping Overview ................................................................................................... 192 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 192 15.2 Interface Grouping Setup ......................................................................................................... 192 15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration ....................................................................................... 194 15.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria ............................................................................................. 196 Chapter 16 Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................198 16.1 Firewall Overview ........................................................................................................................ 198 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 10 Table of Contents 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 198 16.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 199 16.2 Firewall Settings ........................................................................................................................... 199 16.3 Protocol Settings ......................................................................................................................... 201 16.3.1 Add New/Edit Protocol Entry ........................................................................................... 201 16.4 Access Control ............................................................................................................................ 202 16.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ....................................................................................................... 203 16.5 DoS Settings ................................................................................................................................. 205 Chapter 17 MAC Filter .........................................................................................................................................207 17.1 MAC Filter Overview ................................................................................................................... 207 17.2 MAC Filter Settings ...................................................................................................................... 207 Chapter 18 Parental Control ...............................................................................................................................209 18.1 Parental Control Overview ........................................................................................................ 209 18.2 Parental Control Settings ........................................................................................................... 209 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile ................................................................................ 210 Chapter 19 Scheduler Rule .................................................................................................................................215 19.1 Scheduler Rule Overview .......................................................................................................... 215 19.2 Scheduler Rule Settings .............................................................................................................. 215 19.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule Rule ................................................................................................ 215 Chapter 20 Certificates .......................................................................................................................................217 20.1 Certificates Overview ................................................................................................................ 217 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 217 20.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................................... 217 20.3 Local Certificates ....................................................................................................................... 217 20.3.1 Create Certificate Request ............................................................................................. 218 20.3.2 View Certificate Request ................................................................................................. 219 20.4 Trusted CA ................................................................................................................................... 221 20.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate ............................................................................................ 222 20.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate .......................................................................................... 223 Chapter 21 VoIP ...................................................................................................................................................224 21.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 224 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 224 21.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP ............................................................................. 225 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 21.2 Before You Begin ........................................................................................................................ 225 21.3 The SIP Account Screen ............................................................................................................. 226 21.3.1 The SIP Account Add/Edit Screen ................................................................................... 226 21.4 The SIP Service Provider Screen ................................................................................................ 230 21.4.1 The SIP Service Provider Add/Edit Screen ...................................................................... 231 21.5 The Phone Device Screen ......................................................................................................... 235 21.5.1 The Phone Device Edit Screen ........................................................................................ 236 21.6 The Phone Region Screen ......................................................................................................... 238 21.7 The Call Rule Screen .................................................................................................................. 238 21.8 The Call History Screen ............................................................................................................... 239 21.9 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 240 21.9.1 Quality of Service (QoS) ................................................................................................... 248 21.9.2 Phone Services Overview ................................................................................................. 249 Chapter 22 Log ....................................................................................................................................................254 22.1 Log Overview .............................................................................................................................. 254 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 254 22.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 254 22.2 System Log .................................................................................................................................. 255 22.3 Security Log ................................................................................................................................ 256 Chapter 23 Traffic Status .....................................................................................................................................257 23.1 Traffic Status Overview ............................................................................................................... 257 23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 257 23.2 WAN Status .................................................................................................................................. 257 23.3 LAN Status .................................................................................................................................... 258 23.4 NAT Status ......................................................................... 259 Chapter 24 VoIP Status ........................................................................................................................................261 24.1 The VoIP Status Screen ............................................................................................................... 261 Chapter 25 ARP Table ..........................................................................................................................................264 25.1 ARP Table Overview ................................................................................................................... 264 25.1.1 How ARP Works .................................................................................................................. 264 25.2 ARP Table Settings ...................................................................................................................... 264 Chapter 26 Routing Table....................................................................................................................................266 26.1 Routing Table Overview ............................................................................................................ 266 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 12 Table of Contents 26.2 Routing Table Settings ................................................................................................................ 266 Chapter 27 Multicast Status ...............................................................................................................................269 27.1 Multicast Status Overview ......................................................................................................... 269 27.2 IGMP Status ................................................................................................................................. 269 27.3 MLD Status ................................................................................................................................... 270 Chapter 28 WLAN Station Status .........................................................................................................................271 28.1 WLAN Station Status Overview .................................................................................................. 271 Chapter 29 xPON Status ......................................................................................................................................273 29.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 273 29.2 xPON Status Screen .................................................................................................................... 273 Chapter 30 System...............................................................................................................................................274 30.1 System Overview ........................................................................................................................ 274 30.2 System Settings ............................................................................................................................ 274 Chapter 31 User Account....................................................................................................................................275 31.1 User Account Overview ............................................................................................................. 275 31.2 User Account Settings ................................................................................................................ 275 31.2.1 User Account Add/Edit .................................................................................................... 276 Chapter 32 Remote Management .....................................................................................................................278 32.1 Remote Management Overview ............................................................................................. 278 32.2 MGMT Services ............................................................................................................................ 278 32.3 Trust Domain ................................................................................................................................ 279 32.3.1 Add Trust Domain .............................................................................................................. 280 Chapter 33 SNMP .................................................................................................................................................281 33.1 SNMP Overview .......................................................................................................................... 281 33.2 SNMP Settings .............................................................................................................................. 282 Chapter 34 Time Settings.....................................................................................................................................284 34.1 Time Settings Overview .............................................................................................................. 284 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 13 Table of Contents 34.2 Time .............................................................................................................................................. 284 Chapter 35 Email Notification .............................................................................................................................287 35.1 Email Notification Overview ...................................................................................................... 287 35.2 Email Notification Settings ......................................................................................................... 287 35.2.1 Email Notification Edit ....................................................................................................... 288 Chapter 36 Log Setting .......................................................................................................................................290 36.1 Logs Setting Overview ................................................................................................................ 290 36.2 Log Settings ................................................................................................................................. 290 36.2.1 Example Email Log ............................................................................................................ 292 Chapter 37 Firmware Upgrade ...........................................................................................................................294 37.1 Firmware Upgrade Overview .................................................................................................... 294 37.2 Firmware Upgrade Settings ....................................................................................................... 294 Chapter 38 Backup and Restore ........................................................................................................................296 38.1 Backup/Restore Overview ........................................................................................................ 296 38.2 Backup/Restore Settings ............................................................................................................ 296 38.3 Reboot ......................................................................................................................................... 298 Chapter 39 Diagnostic.........................................................................................................................................299 39.1 Diagnostic Overview .................................................................................................................. 299 39.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 299 39.2 Diagnostic Screen ...................................................................................................................... 299 Chapter 40 GPON ................................................................................................................................................301 40.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 301 40.2 SLID ............................................................................................................................................... 301 Part III: Troubleshooting and Appendices .................................................. 302 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................303 41.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ............................................................................... 303 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 14 Table of Contents 41.2 Zyxel Device Access and Login ................................................................................................ 304 41.3 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................... 305 41.4 Wireless Internet Access ............................................................................................................. 306 41.5 UPnP ............................................................................................................................................. 307 Appendix A Customer Support ..................................................................................................... 308 Appendix B IPv6............................................................................................................................... 314 Appendix C Services....................................................................................................................... 322 Appendix D Legal Information ...................................................................................................... 326 Index .................................................................................................................................................334 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 15 PART I Users Guide 16 C H A P T E R 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device 1.1 Overview 1.1.1 Multi-Gigabit The Zyxel Device is a GPON (Gigabit Passive Optical Network) router that offers dual-band WiFi connectivity and comes with a built-in 4-port Gigabit Ethernet switch and two phone ports to make Internet (VoIP) phone calls. The Zyxel Device also provides one 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GbE) LAN port that supports Multi-Gigabit. See Section 1.1.1 on page 17 for more information about Multi-Gigabit. A 10 Gigabit Ethernet port supports speeds of 10 Gbps if the connected device supports 10 Gbps and a Cat 6a (up to 100 m) or Cat 6 cable (up to 50 m) is used. Some network devices such as gaming computers, servers, network attached storage (NAS) devices, or access points may have network cards that are capable of 2.5 Gbps or 5 Gbps connectivity. If these devices are connected to a 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps Ethernet port, they can only transmit or receive up to 1 Gbps as speeds of 10 Gbps cannot be attained. Moreover, if network devices with 10 Gbps network cards are connected to a 10 Gbps Ethernet port, you must use Cat 6A or better Ethernet cables to achieve 10 Gbps speeds. Most buildings, at the time of writing, use Cat 5e or Cat 6 Ethernet cables. Multi-Gigabit Ethernet ports automatically allow connections up to the speed of the connected network device (100 Mbps, 1 Gbps, 2.5 Gbps or 5 Gbps), and you just need to use a Cat 5e or Cat 6 Ethernet cable. See the following table for the cables required and distance limitation to attain the corresponding speed. Table 1 Cable Types CABLE TRANSMISSION SPEED MAXIMUM DISTANCE BANDWIDTH CAPACITY Category 5 100 Mbps Category 5e 1 Gbps/2.5 Gbps/5 Gbps Category 6 5 Gbps/10 Gbps Category 6a Category 7 10 Gbps 10 Gbps 100 m 100 m 50 m 100 m 100 m 100 MHz 100 MHz 250 MHz 500 MHz 650 MHz 1.2 Example Applications This section shows a few examples of using the Zyxel Device in various network environments. Note that the Zyxel Device in the figure is just an example Zyxel Device and not your actual Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device 1.2.1 Internet Access Your Zyxel Device provides shared Internet access by connecting a fiber optic cable provided by the ISP to the PON port. It supports OMCI (ONU Management and Control Interface) to connect to the ISPs OLT (Optical Line Terminal). Computers can connect to the Zyxel Devices LAN ports (or wirelessly) and access the Internet simultaneously. Figure 1 Internet Access Application You can also configure Firewall on the Zyxel Device for secure Internet access. When the Firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. 1.2.2 Dual-Band WiFi By default, the wireless LAN (WLAN) is enabled on the Zyxel Device. IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax compliant clients can wirelessly connect to the Zyxel Device to access network resources. The Zyxel Device is a dual-band gateway that can use both 2.4G and 5G networks at the same time. You could use the 2.4 GHz band for regular Internet surfing and downloading while using the 5 GHz band for time sensitive traffic like high-definition video, music, and gaming. Figure 2 Dual-Band Application PX7511-B0 Users Guide 18 Chapter 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device 1.2.3 VoIP Application The Zyxel Devices VoIP function allows you to register up to 2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) accounts and use the Zyxel Device to make and receive VoIP telephone calls. The Zyxel Device sends your call to a VoIP service providers SIP server which forwards the calls to either VoIP or PSTN phones. Figure 3 VoIP Application 1.3 Ways to Manage the Zyxel Device Use any of the following methods to manage the Zyxel Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for management of the Zyxel Device using a (supported) web browser. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Use for collecting and organizing information about the Zyxel Device and for modifying that information to change the Zyxel Device behavior. Secure Shell (SSH), Telnet. Use for troubleshooting the Zyxel Device by qualified personnel. FTP. Use FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. 1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Zyxel Device Do the following things regularly to make the Zyxel Device more secure and to manage the Zyxel Device more effectively. Change the WiFi and Web Configurator passwords. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the passwords and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the Zyxel Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Zyxel Device. You could simply restore your last configuration. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device 1.5 Hardware This section describes the front and rear panels for each model. If your model is not shown here, refer to the Zyxel Devices Quick Start Guides to see the product drawings and how to make the hardware connections. 1.5.1 Front Panel The LED indicators are located on the front panel. Figure 4 LED Indicators None of the LEDs are on if the Zyxel Device is not receiving power. Table 2 LED Descriptions COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION LED UPS Green On The main power is off, and the Zyxel Device is receiving power from the connected UPS (battery backup). Blinking Off The Zyxel Device is not receiving backup power properly. The connected UPS may have low voltage output. The Zyxel Device is not receiving power from the connected UPS (battery backup). PX7511-B0 Users Guide 20 Chapter 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device Table 2 LED Descriptions (continued) LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION POWER Green On The Zyxel Device is receiving power and ready for use. Blinking The Zyxel Device is self-testing. Red On The Zyxel Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. Blinking The Zyxel Device is upgrading firmware. The Zyxel Device is not receiving power. PON Green The PON port is connected to the ISPs ONT and the Zyxel Device is receiving optical signals normally. Blinking The Zyxel Devices PON port is trying to build a PON connection. Red Blinking The receive optical power (the strength of optical signals transmitted on the remote optical module) is too low. INTERNET Green The Zyxel Device has an IP connection but no traffic. The connection to the ISPs ONT is down. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used). Blinking The Zyxel Device is sending or receiving IP traffic. Red There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode. The Zyxel Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed. 2.4G WiFi Green On The 2.4G wireless network is activated. Blinking The Zyxel Device is communicating with 2.4G wireless clients. The 2.4G wireless network is not activated. 5G WiFi Green The 5G wireless network is activated. Blinking The Zyxel Device is communicating with 5G wireless clients. The 5G wireless network is not activated. PHONE Green A SIP account is registered for the phone port. Blinking The telephone connected to this phone port has an incoming call or is off the hook. The phone port does not have a SIP account registered. Amber A SIP account is registered for the phone port, and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account. Blinking The telephone connected to this phone port has an incoming call or is off the hook. There is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account. WPS Green Blinking The Zyxel Device is setting up a WPS connection with a wireless client. The Zyxel Device has set up a WPS connection with a wireless client or WPS has not been enabled. Off On On On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off 1.5.2 Rear Panel The connection ports are located on the rear panel. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device Figure 5 Rear Panel LABEL Reset 10G LAN USB Power UPS The following table describes the items on the rear panel. Table 3 Panel Ports and Buttons DESCRIPTION Press the button to return the Zyxel Device to the factory defaults. LAN1 ~ LAN4 Connect computers or other Ethernet devices to Ethernet ports for Internet access. The USB port is reserved for future development. Connect the power adapter and press the power button to start the device. Connect a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) to the UPS port to have a backup power source when the main power fails. PHONE 1/2 Connect analog phones to the PHONE ports to make phone calls. PON Connect the fiber optic cable to the PON port for Internet access. 1.5.3 The WPS Button To activate WPS:

You can use the WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the Zyxel Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 22 Chapter 1 Introducing the Zyxel Device 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking. Press the WPS button for one second and release it. 2 3 Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the Zyxel Device within 120 seconds. The WPS LED flashes green while the Zyxel Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device. 4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WPS LED will turn off. Note: Your Zyxel Device supports both 2.4G and 5G WiFi networks, the connection to the 2.4G wireless network has priority. 1.5.4 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need to use the RESET button to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously. The password will be reset to the factory default (see the device label), and the LAN IP address will be 192.168.1.1. 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for more than 5 seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 1.5.5 The UPS Port You can connect a UPS to the UPS port to keep the Zyxel Device running in case the main power fails. The following diagram and chart show the pin assignments of the UPS port on the Zyxel Device. Figure 6 UPS Port Pin Layout Table 4 UPS Port Pin Assignment PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Power Input +12V On Battery Missing Battery 12V Power Return 12V Power Return Replace Battery Low Battery NC Unused PX7511-B0 Users Guide 23 C H A P T E R 2 The Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The Web Configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy Zyxel Device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 11 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 67.0.2 and later versions or Safari 5.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your Zyxel Device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows 10. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 2 4 1 Make sure your Zyxel Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). Launch your web browser. If the Zyxel Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go to http://192.168.1.1. 3 A login screen displays. Select the language you prefer. To access the administrative Web Configurator and manage the Zyxel Device, type the default username admin and the randomly assigned default password (see the device label) in the login screen and click Login. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 24 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Figure 7 Login Screen 5 The following screen displays when you log into the Web Configurator for the first time. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm, and click Change password. If you prefer to use the default password, click Skip. Figure 8 Change Password Screen 6 7 The Wizard screen displays when you log into the Web Configurator for the first time. Use the Wizard screens to configure the Zyxel Devices time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless settings. See Chapter 3 on page 32 for more information about the Wizard screens. The Connection Status page appears. Use this screen to configure basic Internet access, wireless settings, and parental control settings. See Chapter 5 on page 60 for more information about the Connection Status screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Figure 9 Connection Status 2.2 Web Configurator Layout Figure 10 Screen Layout A B As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:

A - Navigation Panel B - Main Window PX7511-B0 Users Guide 26 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2.2.1 Navigation Panel Click the menu icon (

links). Click X to close the navigation panel. Figure 11 Navigation Panel

) to display the navigation panel that contains configuration menus and icons (quick 2.2.1.1 Configuration Menus Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Zyxel Device features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 5 Configuration Menus Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Connection Status Network Setting Broadband Broadband Use this screen to configure basic Internet access, wireless settings, and parental control settings. This screen also shows the network status of the Zyxel Device and computers/devices connected to it. Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add new WAN connections. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 27 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 5 Configuration Menus Summary (continued) LINK TAB FUNCTION Wireless General Use this screen to configure the WiFi settings and WLAN authentication/

security settings. Guest/More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Zyxel Device. MAC Authentication Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the Zyxel Device. WPS WMM Others Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) settings. Use this screen to enable or disable WiFi MultiMedia (WMM). Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Channel Status Use this screen to scan WiFi channel noises and view the results. Home Networking LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties. Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses. UPnP Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off. Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP. Additional Subnet STB Vendor ID Use this screen to configure the Vendor IDs of the connected Set Top Box

(STB) devices, which have the Zyxel Device automatically create static DHCP entries for the STB devices when they request IP addresses. Wake on LAN Use this screen to remotely turn on a device on the local network. TFTP Server Name Use DHCP option 66 to identify a TFTP server name. Routing Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Zyxel Device. DNS Route Use this screen to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). Policy Route Use this screen to configure policy routing on the Zyxel Device. RIP Use this screen to configure Routing Information Protocol to exchange routing information with other routers. QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also configure the QoS rules and actions. Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues. Classification Setup Use this screen to define a classifier. Shaper Setup Use this screen to limit outgoing traffic rate on the selected interface. Policer Setup Use this screen to configure QoS policers. NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. Port Triggering Use this screen to change your Zyxel Devices port triggering settings. DMZ ALG Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen. Use this screen to enable the ALGs (Application Layer Gateways) in the Zyxel Device to allow applications to operate through NAT. Address Mapping Use this screen to change your Zyxel Devices address mapping settings. Sessions Use this screen to configure the maximum number of NAT sessions each client host is allowed to have through the Zyxel Device. DNS DNS Entry Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes. Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 28 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 5 Configuration Menus Summary (continued) LINK TAB FUNCTION IGMP/MLD IGMP/MLD Use this screen to configure multicast settings (IGMP for IPv4 and MLD for IPv6 multicast groups) on the WAN. VLAN Group VLAN Group Use this screen to group and tag VLAN IDs to outgoing traffic from the specified interface. Use this screen to create multiple networks on the Zyxel Device. Interface Grouping Interface Grouping Security Firewall General Protocol DoS Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall. Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules. Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services. Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. MAC Filter MAC Filter Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC addresses to the Zyxel Device. Parental Control Parental Control Use this screen to limit the time a user can access the Internet and block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. Scheduler Rule Scheduler Rule Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured restriction (such as parental control) is enforced. Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage certificates and certification requests. Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs. VoIP SIP SIP Account SIP Service Provider Use this screen to set up information about your SIP account and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the Zyxel Device. Use this screen to configure the SIP server information, and other SIP settings, such as QoS for VoIP calls, outbound proxy, DTMF mode and SIP timers.. Phone Phone Device Use this screen to control which SIP account(s) each phone uses to handle outgoing and incoming calls. Call Rule Regine Call Rule Call History Call History System Monitor Log System Log Use this screen to select your location and call service mode. Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you call often. Use this screen to view detailed information for each outgoing call you made or each incoming call from someone calling you. You can also view a summary list of received, dialed and missed calls. Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the Zyxel Device. You can export or email the logs. Security Log Use this screen to view all security related events. You can select level and category of the security events in their proper drop-down list window. Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the Zyxel Device. LAN NAT Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the Zyxel Device. Use this screen to view NAT statistics for connected hosts. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 29 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 5 Configuration Menus Summary (continued) LINK TAB FUNCTION VoIP Status VoIP Status Use this screen to view VoIP registration, current call status and phone numbers for the phone ports. ARP Table ARP Table Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC address of each DHCP connection. Routing Table Routing Table Use this screen to view the routing table on the Zyxel Device. Multicast Status IGMP Status Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the Zyxel Device. MLD Status Use this screen to view the status of all MLD settings on the Zyxel Device. WLAN Station Status WLAN Station Status Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently connected to the Zyxel Device. xPON Status xPON Status Use this screen to view the fiber optical transceivers TX power and RX power level and its temperature. Maintenance System System Use this screen to set Device name and Domain name. User Account User Account Use this screen to change user password on the Zyxel Device. Remote Management Trust Domain MGMT Services Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services. Use this screen to view a list of public IP addresses which are allowed to access the Zyxel Device through the services configured in the Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services screen. SNMP SNMP Use this screen to configure SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) settings. Time Time Use this screen to change your Zyxel Devices time and date. E-mail Notification E-mail Notification Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender addresses on the Zyxel Device. Log Settings Log Setting Use this screen to change your Zyxel Devices log settings. Use this screen to upload firmware to your Zyxel Device. Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Backup/Restore Backup/Restore Use this screen to backup and restore your Zyxel Devices configuration

(settings) or reset the factory default settings. Reboot Reboot Use this screen to reboot the Zyxel Device without turning the power off. Diagnostic Ping&Traceroute

&Nslookup Use this screen to identify problems with the Zyxel Device. You can use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems. GPON SLID Use this screen to change your Zyxel Devices Subscriber Location ID

(SLID) setting. The SLID identifies your device to the GPON service providers Optical Line Terminal (OLT). PX7511-B0 Users Guide 30 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2.2.1.2 Icons The navigation panel provides some icons on the right hand side. The icons provide the following functions. Table 6 Web Configurator Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Wizard: Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the Zyxel Devices time zone Internet access, and wireless settings. See Chapter 3 on page 32 for more information about the Wizard screens. Theme: Click this icon to select a color that you prefer and apply it to the Web Configurator. Restart: Click this icon to reboot the Zyxel Device without turning the power off. Language: Select the language you prefer. Logout: Click this icon to log out of the Web Configurator. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 31 C H A P T E R 3 Quick Start Wizard Use the Wizard screens to configure the Zyxel Devices time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless settings. Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on Chapter 4 on page 37) for background information on the features in this chapter. 3.1 Overview 3.2 Wizard Setup You can click the Wizard icon in the navigation panel to open the Wizard screens. See Section 2.2.1 on page 27 for more information about the navigation panel. After you click the Wizard icon, the following screen appears. Click Lets Go to proceed with settings on time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless networks. It will take you a few minutes to complete the settings on the Wizard screens. You can also click Skip to leave the Wizard screens. Figure 12 Wizard - Home 3.2.1 Time Zone Select the time zone of your location. Click Next. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 32 Chapter 3 Quick Start Wizard Figure 13 Wizard - Time Zone 3.2.2 Internet 1 The Zyxel Device will check the Internet status automatically, and determine your connection type. Click Next to proceed. You can also click Skip to pass Internet settings in the Wizard. Figure 14 Wizard - Internet 2 If the following screen displays, select the encapsulation type your ISP uses. Click Next. Figure 15 Wizard - Internet Information (IPoE) Enter your Internet connection information. The screen and fields to enter may vary depending on your current connection type. Click Next. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 33 Chapter 3 Quick Start Wizard Figure 16 Wizard - Internet Connection Information (PPPoE) 3 Click Next when the Zyxel Device has a successful Internet connection. Figure 17 Wizard - Successful WAN Connection Unsuccessful Internet Connection The following screen displays when the Zyxel Device did not detect a WAN connection. Connect a fiber optic cable to the PON port for Internet access if you have not connected any. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 34 Chapter 3 Quick Start Wizard Figure 18 Wizard - WAN Connection is Down Incorrect Internet Information If the following screen displays, click Next to configure the Internet settings. Figure 19 Wizard - Incorrect Internet Information 3.2.3 WiFi Turn WiFi on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure your wireless clients to connect to the Zyxel Device. Click the Keep 2.4G and 5G the same check box to use the same SSID for 2.4G and 5G wireless networks. Otherwise, deselect the check box to have two different SSIDs for 2.4G and 5G wireless networks. The screen and fields to enter may vary when you select or deselect the check box. Click Done to complete the setup. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 35 Chapter 3 Quick Start Wizard Figure 20 Wizard - WiFi PX7511-B0 Users Guide 36 C H A P T E R 4 Tutorials 4.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to use the Zyxel Devices various features. Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 37 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups, see page 44 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 49 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup, see page 51 Access the Zyxel Device Using DDNS, see page 55 Configuring the MAC Address Filter, see page 57 4.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet. In this wireless network, the Zyxel Device serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP. Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the Zyxel Device. Then he can set up a wireless network using WPS (Section 4.2.2 on page 39) or manual configuration (Section 4.2.3 on page 43). 4.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network. SSID Security Mode Example WPA2-PSK Pre-Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork 802.11 Mode 802.11b/g/n/ax Mixed PX7511-B0 Users Guide 37 Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level and WPA2-PSK as the security mode. Configure the screen using the provided parameters (see page 37). Click Apply. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 38 Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Go to the Wireless > Others screen and select 802.11b/g/n/ax Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply. Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the Zyxel Device (see Section 4.2.2 on page 39). He can also use the notebooks wireless client to search for the Zyxel Device (see Section 4.2.3 on page 43). 4.2.2 Using WPS This section gives you an example of how to set up a wireless network using WPS. This example uses the Zyxel Device as the AP and a WPS-enabled Android smartphone as the wireless client. There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection. This tutorial shows you how to do both. Push Button Configuration (PBC) - create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button. See Section on page 39. This is the easier method. PIN Configuration - create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client's PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the Zyxel Devices interface. See Section on page 41. This is the more secure method, since one device can authenticate the other. Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your Zyxel Device is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal. 2 Push and hold the WPS button located on the Zyxel Devices front panel for one second. Alternatively, you may log into the Zyxel Devices Web Configurator and go to the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function for method 1 and click Apply. Then click the Connect button. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 39 Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 3 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 40 2 Note: Your Zyxel Device has a WPS button located on its side panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use one or the other. Note: It does not matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The Zyxel Device sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the Zyxel Device securely. The following figure shows you how to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both Zyxel Device and wireless client (the Android phone in this example). Chapter 4 Tutorials Figure 21 Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION Example WPS Process: PBC Method PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to check the clients PIN number and use the Zyxel Devices configuration interface. 1 Go to your phone settings and turn on WiFi. Open the WiFi networks list and tap WPS PIN Entry to get a PIN number. 2 Log into Zyxel Devices Web Configurator and go to the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 41 Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 3 2 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 42 3 Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button. Activate WPS function on the wireless client utility screen within two minutes. The Zyxel Device authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the Zyxel Device securely. The following figure shows you how to set up wireless network and security on Zyxel Device and wireless client (Android smartphone in this example) by using the PIN method. Chapter 4 Tutorials Figure 22 Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:

WPS Register WITHIN 2 MINUTES Authentication by PIN SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION PX7511-B0 Users Guide 43 Example WPS Process: PIN Method 4.2.3 Without WPS Use the wireless adapters utility installed on the notebook to search for the Example SSID. Then enter the DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork pre-shared key to establish a wireless Internet connection. Note: The Zyxel Device supports IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.3 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown in the following figure. Each group has its own SSID and security mode. Employees in Company A will use a general Company wireless network group. Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group. Visiting guests will use the Guest group, which has a different SSID and password. Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups. SSID COMPANY Company VIP VIP Security Level More Secure More Secure More Secure Security Mode WPA2-PSK Pre-Shared Key ForCompanyOnly WPA2-PSK 123456789 GUEST Guest WPA2-PSK guest123 1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Use this screen to set up the companys general wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 44 Chapter 4 Tutorials PX7511-B0 Users Guide 45 Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Click Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP to open the following screen. Click the Edit icon to configure the second wireless network group. 3 Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 46 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 In the Guest/More AP screen, click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 47 Chapter 4 Tutorials 5 Check the status of VIP and Guest in the Guest/More AP screen. The yellow bulbs signify that the SSIDs are active and ready for wireless access. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 48 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.4 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the Zyxel Devices LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. In the following figure, router R is connected to the Zyxel Devices LAN. R connects to two networks, N1

(192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the Zyxel Devices WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. You need to specify a static routing rule on the Zyxel Device to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the Zyxel Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 49 Chapter 4 Tutorials This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:

Table 7 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The Zyxel Devices WAN The Zyxel Devices LAN IP Type Use Interface A B Rs N1 Rs N2 IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.1 192.168.1.1 IPv4 Ethernet 192.168.1.34 192.168.1.253 192.168.10.2 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:

1 Log into the Zyxel Devices Web Configurator in advanced mode. 2 Click Network Setting > Routing. 3 Click Add new Static Route in the Static Route screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 50 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 Create a new static route using the following settings:

4a Click the Active button to enable this static route. When the switch goes to the right (

), the function is enabled. Enter the Route Name as R. 4b Set IP Type to IPv4. N2. 4c Type the Destination IP Address 192.168.10.0 and IP Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, 4d Click the Use Gateway IP Address button to enable this function. When the switch goes to the right

), the function is enabled. Type 192.168.1.253 (Rs N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field.

4e Select ETHWAN as the Use Interface. 4a Click OK. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure Bs firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. 4.5 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen. Let us say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize email traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and email archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 51 Chapter 4 Tutorials In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that email traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:

Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to email traffic going to the WAN interface, so that email traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 7. Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the Zyxel Device. Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the Zyxel Device. 10,000 kbps Your computer IP=192.168.1.23 and/or MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF Email traffic: Highest priority A colleagues computer Other traffic: Automatic classifier QoS Example Tutorial: Advanced > QoS 1 Click Network Setting > QoS > General and click the QoS button to enable. When the switch goes to the right (

leave this blank to have the Zyxel Device automatically determine this figure). Click Apply.

), the function is enabled. Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or 2 Click Network > Queue Setup > Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, click the Active field to enable. When the switch goes to the right (

select the following values:

), the function is enabled. Enter or Name: Email PX7511-B0 Users Guide 52 Chapter 4 Tutorials Interface: WAN Priority: 1 (High) Weight: 8 Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps) Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup 3 Click Network > QoS > Classification Setup > Add new Classification to create a new class. Select Enable in the Active field and follow the settings as shown in the screen below. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 53 Chapter 4 Tutorials Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup PX7511-B0 Users Guide 54 Chapter 4 Tutorials Class Name Give a class name to this traffic, such as Email in this example. From Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select LAN1 for this example. Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address. IP Address Type the IP address of your computer - 192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it. MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer - AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you know it. To Queue Index Link this to an item in the Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup screen, which is the Email queue created in this example. This maps email traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computers IP address and MAC address to the Email queue (see the Source fields). 4.6 Access the Zyxel Device Using DDNS If you connect your Zyxel Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The Zyxel Devices WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the Zyxel Device using a domain name. To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org. This tutorial covers:

Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org Configuring DDNS on Your Zyxel Device Testing the DDNS Setting Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS. 4.6.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org 1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org. 2 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password. 3 Log into www.dyndns.org using your account. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 55 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example. Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Service Type: Host with IP address IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your Zyxel Device is currently using. You can find the IP address on the Zyxel Devices Web Configurator Status page. Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the Zyxel Device later. 4.6.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Zyxel Device Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS screen. Select Enable Dynamic DNS. Select www.DynDNS.com as the service provider. Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field. Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345). Click Apply. 4.6.3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the Zyxel Device from the Internet. To test this:

1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 56 Chapter 4 Tutorials Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter]. 2 3 The Zyxel Devices login page should appear. You can then log into the Zyxel Device and manage it. 4.7 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams. Josephines computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the Zyxel Device. Thomas decides to use the Security > MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to Josephines computer. 1 Click Security > MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen. Select the Enable check box to activate MAC filter function. 2 Select Allow. Click Add a new setting to add a new entry. Then enter the host name and MAC address of Thomas computer in this screen. Click Apply. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 57 Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends. However, Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet through the Zyxel Device. Chapter 4 Tutorials PX7511-B0 Users Guide 58 PART II Technical Reference 59 C H A P T E R 5 Connection Status 5.1 Overview After you log into the Web Configurator, the Connection Status screen appears. You can configure basic Internet access, wireless settings, and parental control settings in this screen. It also shows the network status of the Zyxel Device and computers/devices connected to it. Figure 23 Connection Status PX7511-B0 Users Guide 60 Chapter 5 Connection Status 5.1.1 Layout Icon Click this icon (

Check icon (

) in the lower left corner to save the changes.

) to arrange the screen order. Select a block and hold it to move around. Click the 5.1.2 Connectivity Figure 24 Connectivity Use this screen to view the network connection status of the Zyxel Device and its clients. Click the Arrow icon (

addresses of the wireless and wired devices connected to the Zyxel Device.

) to open the following screen. Use this screen to view IP addresses and MAC Place your mouse within the device block, and an Edit icon (

change the icon and name of a connected device.

) will appear. Click the Edit icon to PX7511-B0 Users Guide 61 Chapter 5 Connection Status Figure 25 Connectivity: Connected Devices 5.1.2.1 Icon and Device Name You can change the icon and name of a connected device by clicking the devices Edit icon. Select an icon and/or enter a name in the Device Name field for a connected device. Click Save to save your changes. Figure 26 Connectivity: Edit 5.1.3 System Info Use this screen to view the basic system information of the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 62 Chapter 5 Connection Status Figure 27 System Info Click the Arrow icon (

status of your firewall and interfaces (WAN, LAN, and wireless LAN).

) to open the following screen. Use this screen to view more information on the Figure 28 System Info: Detailed Information Each field is described in the following table. Table 8 System Info: Detailed Information LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name This field displays the Zyxel Device system name. It is used for identification. Model Name This shows the model number of your Zyxel Device. Serial Number This field displays the serial number of the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 63 Chapter 5 Connection Status Table 8 System Info: Detailed Information (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Firmware Version This is the current version of the firmware inside the Zyxel Device. System Up Time Interface Status This field displays how long the Zyxel Device has been running since it last started up. The Zyxel Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Reboot), or when you reset it. Virtual ports are shown here. You can see whether the ports are in use and their transmission rate. WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.) Encapsulation This field displays the current encapsulation method. IP Address This field displays the current IPv4 address of the Zyxel Device in the WAN. Click the Release button to release the IP address provided by a DHCP server. IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. IPv6 Address This field displays the current IPv6 address of the Zyxel Device in the WAN. MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) address of your Zyxel Device. This field displays the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. This field displays the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. This field displays the first DNS server IPv6 address assigned by the ISP. This field displays the second DNS server IPv6 address assigned by the ISP. IP Address This is the current IPv4 address of the Zyxel Device in the LAN. Subnet Mask This is the current subnet mask in the LAN. IPv6 Address This field displays the current IPv6 address of the Zyxel Device in the LAN. This field displays the current link-local address of the Zyxel Device for the LAN interface. This field displays what DHCP services the Zyxel Device is providing to the LAN. The possible values are:

Server - The Zyxel Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The Zyxel Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The Zyxel Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) address of your Zyxel Device. Security Status SSID Firewall This displays the firewalls current security level. WLAN 2.4G/5G Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) address of the wireless interface. This displays whether the WLAN is activated. This is the descriptive name used to identify the Zyxel Device in a wireless LAN. Channel This is the channel number used by the wireless interface now. Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server Primary DNSv6 server Secondary DNSv6 server LAN Information IPv6 Link Local Address DHCP PX7511-B0 Users Guide 64 Chapter 5 Connection Status Table 8 System Info: Detailed Information (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Security This displays the type of security mode the wireless interface is using in the wireless LAN. 802.11 Mode This displays the type of 802.11 mode the wireless interface is using in the wireless LAN. WPS This displays whether WPS is activated on the wireless interface. 5.2 WiFi Settings Use this screen to enable or disable the main 2.4G and/or 5G wireless networks. When the switch goes to the right (

), the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. You can use this screen or the QR code on the upper right corner to check the SSIDs (WiFi network name) and passwords of the main wireless networks. If you want to show or hide your WiFi passwords, click the Eye icon (

). Figure 29 WiFi Settings Click the Arrow icon (

passwords for your main wireless networks. Select Keep 2.4G and 5G the same to use the same SSID for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands.

) to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the SSIDs and/or PX7511-B0 Users Guide 65 Chapter 5 Connection Status Figure 30 WiFi Settings: Configuration Each field is described in the following table. Table 9 WiFi Settings: Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Keep 2.4G and 5G the same Select this and the 2.4G and 5G wireless networks will use the same SSID. If you deselect this, the screen will change. You need to assign different SSIDs for the 2.4G and 5G wireless networks. 2.4G/5G WiFi WiFi Name Click this switch to enable or disable the 2.4G and/or 5G wireless networks. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for WiFi. WiFi Password If you selected Random Password, this field displays a pre-shared key generated by the Zyxel Device. If you did not select Random Password, you can manually type a pre-shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters. Click the Eye icon to show or hide the password for your wireless network. When the Eye icon is slashed

, youll see the password in plain text. Otherwise, it is hidden. Random Password Select this option to have the Zyxel Device automatically generate a password. The WiFi Password field will not be configurable when you select this option. Hide WiFi Name Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Note: Disable WPS in the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen to hide the SSID. Save Click Save to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 66 Chapter 5 Connection Status 5.3 Guest WiFi Settings Use this screen to enable or disable the guest 2.4G and/or 5G wireless networks. When the switch goes to the right (

), the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. You can check their SSIDs (WiFi network name) and passwords from this screen. If you want to show or hide your WiFi passwords, click the Eye icon. Figure 31 Guest WiFi Settings Click the Arrow icon (

passwords for your guest wireless networks.

) to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the SSIDs and/or Figure 32 Guest WiFi Settings: Configuration To assign different SSIDs to the 2.4G and 5G guest wireless networks, clear the Keep 2.4G and 5G the same check box in the WiFi Settings screen, and the Guest WiFi Settings screen will change. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 67 Chapter 5 Connection Status Figure 33 Guest WiFi Settings: Different SSIDs Each field is described in the following table. Table 10 WiFi Settings: Configuration DESCRIPTION LABEL WiFi 2.4G/5G WiFi WiFi Name Click this switch to enable or disable the 2.4G and/or 5G wireless networks. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. WiFi Password If you selected Random Password, this field displays a pre-shared key generated by the Zyxel Device. If you did not select Random Password, you can manually type a pre-shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters. Click the Eye icon to show or hide the password of your wireless network. When the Eye icon is slashed

, youll see the password in plain text. Otherwise, it is hidden. Random Password Select this option to have the Zyxel Device automatically generate a password. The WiFi Password field will not be configurable when you select this option. Hide WiFi Name Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Note: Disable WPS in the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen to hide the SSID. Save Click Save to save your changes. 5.4 LAN Settings Use this screen to view the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 68 Chapter 5 Connection Status Figure 34 LAN Click the Arrow icon (

and DHCP setting for your Zyxel Device.

) to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the LAN IP address Figure 35 LAN Setup Each field is described in the following table. Table 11 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN IP Setup IP Address Subnet Mask IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address Ending IP Address DHCP Server State Enter the LAN IPv4 address you want to assign to your Zyxel Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0

(factory default). Your Zyxel Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 69 Chapter 5 Connection Status Table 11 Status Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Server Lease Time This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems. Days/Hours/

Minutes Enter the lease time of the DHCP server. Save Click Save to save your changes. 5.5 Parental Control Figure 36 Parental Control Use this screen to view the number of profiles that were created for parental control.

) to open the following screen. Use this screen to enable parental control and Click the Arrow icon (

add more profiles. Add a profile to create restricted access schedules. Go to the Security > Parental Control > Add New PCP/Edit screen to configure URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. Figure 37 Parental Control: Scheduled Profile (no profile) PX7511-B0 Users Guide 70 Chapter 5 Connection Status Figure 38 Parental Control: Scheduled Profile Each field is described in the following table. Table 12 Parental Control: Schedule LABEL DESCRIPTION Parental Control Click this switch to enable or disable parental control. When the switch goes to the right

), the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Scheduled Profile This screen shows all the created profile(s). Click profile or click Edit to change the profile settings. to view more information about the profile. You can click Delete to remove the Only the Add more Profile button displays if there is no profile created. Add more Profile Click this button to create a new profile. 5.5.1 Create/Edit a Parental Control Profile Click Add more Profile to create a profile or click Edit of an existing profile to change its settings. Use this screen to add a device(s) in a profile and block Internet access on the profile device(s). Figure 39 Parental Control > Add More Profile: Select Device PX7511-B0 Users Guide 71 Chapter 5 Connection Status Each field is described in the following table. Table 13 Parental Control > Add More Profile: Select Device LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile. Profile Active Click this switch to enable or disable the profile. When the switch goes to the right profile is enabled. Otherwise, it is disabled.

, the Profile Device List This field shows the devices selected on the right for this profile. Allowing Schedule This field shows the time during which Internet access is blocked on the profile device(s). Select the device(s) on your network for this profile and click Next. 5.5.2 Define a Schedule This screen allows you to define time periods and days during which Internet access is blocked on the profile device(s). Figure 40 Parental Control > Add More Profile: Schedule Each field is described in the following table. Table 14 Parental Control > Add More Profile: Schedule LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile. Profile Active Click this switch to enable or disable the profile. When the switch goes to the right profile is enabled. Otherwise, it is disabled.

, the Profile Device List This field shows the devices selected on the right for this profile. Allowing Schedule This field shows the time during which Internet access is blocked on the profile device(s). Schedule Add New Schedule Click this to add a new block for scheduling. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 72 Chapter 5 Connection Status Table 14 Parental Control > Add More Profile: Schedule (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Start/End blocking Select the time period when Internet access is blocked on the profile device(s). Select Whole Week and the scheduler rule will be activated for every day of the week. Repeat On Select the days when Internet access is blocked on the profile device(s). Back Save Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Save to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 73 C H A P T E R 6 Broadband 6.1 Overview This chapter discusses the Zyxel Devices Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your Zyxel Device for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 41 LAN and WAN 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Broadband screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the WAN settings on the Zyxel Device for Internet access (Section 6.2 on page 77). Table 15 WAN Setup Overview LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION CONNECTION MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS Ethernet Routing PPPoE Bridge VLAN IPoE N/A PPP user name and password, WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, NAT, DNS server and routing feature 6.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 74 Chapter 6 Broadband The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Zyxel Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the Zyxel Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Zyxel Device tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es). IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. The Zyxel Device can use IPv4/IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks, and supports IPv6 rapid deployment (6RD). WAN IP Address IPv6 Introduction IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. IPv6 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character

(1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 75 Chapter 6 Broadband IPv6 Rapid Deployment Use IPv6 Rapid Deployment (6rd) when the local network uses IPv6 and the ISP has an IPv4 network. When the Zyxel Device has an IPv4 WAN address and you set IPv4/IPv6 Mode to IPv4 Only, you can enable 6rd to encapsulate IPv6 packets in IPv4 packets to cross the ISPs IPv4 network. The Zyxel Device generates a global IPv6 prefix from its IPv4 WAN address and tunnels IPv6 traffic to the ISPs Border Relay router (BR in the figure) to connect to the native IPv6 Internet. The local network can also use IPv4 services. The Zyxel Device uses its configured IPv4 WAN IP to route IPv4 traffic to the IPv4 Internet. Figure 42 IPv6 Rapid Deployment Dual Stack Lite Use Dual Stack Lite when local network computers use IPv4 and the ISP has an IPv6 network. When the Zyxel Device has an IPv6 WAN address and you set IPv4/IPv6 Mode to IPv6 Only, you can enable Dual Stack Lite to use IPv4 computers and services. The Zyxel Device tunnels IPv4 packets inside IPv6 encapsulation packets to the ISPs Address Family Transition Router (AFTR in the graphic) to connect to the IPv4 Internet. The local network can also use IPv6 services. The Zyxel Device uses its configured IPv6 WAN IP to route IPv6 traffic to the IPv6 Internet. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 76 Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 43 Dual Stack Lite 6.1.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. 6.2 Broadband Settings Use this screen to change your Zyxel Devices Internet access settings. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services (connections) on the Zyxel Device. Use information provided by your ISP to configure WAN settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband to access this screen. Figure 44 Network Setting > Broadband PX7511-B0 Users Guide 77 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Network Setting > Broadband LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New WAN Interface Click this button to create a new connection. This is the index number of the entry. This is the service name of the connection.

Name Type Mode 802.1p 802.1q NAT Default Gateway IPv6 MLD Proxy This indicates it is a broadband connection to a PON (Passive Optical Network). This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode. Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection. This indicates the 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no priority level assigned. This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned. IGMP Proxy This shows whether the Zyxel Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection. This shows whether the Zyxel Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection. IPv6 is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is activated or not for this connection. MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection. Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection. 6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection Click Add New WAN Interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN interface to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the mode, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode you select. 6.2.1.1 Routing Mode Use Routing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. The following example screen displays when you select the Routing mode and PPPoE encapsulation. The screen varies when you select other encapsulation and IPv6/IPv4 mode. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 78 Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 45 Network Setting > Broadband > Add/Edit New WAN Interface (Routing Mode) PX7511-B0 Users Guide 79 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Network Setting > Broadband > Add/Edit New WAN Interface (Routing Mode) DESCRIPTION LABEL General Name Type Mode Click this switch to enable or disable the interface. When the switch goes to the right function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the Specify a descriptive name for this connection. This field shows GPON and indicates a broadband connection to a PON (Passive Optical Network). Select Routing if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field. The choices are PPPoE and IPoE. IPv4/IPv6 Mode Select IPv4 Only if you want the Zyxel Device to run IPv4 only. Select IPv4 IPv6 DualStack to allow the Zyxel Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time. Select IPv6 Only if you want the Zyxel Device to run IPv6 only. PPP Information (This is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field.) PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above. Select password unmask to show your entered password in plain text. PPP Connection Trigger Select when to have the Zyxel Device establish the PPP connection. Auto Connect - select this to not let the connection time out. On Demand - select this to automatically bring up the connection when the Zyxel Device receives packets destined for the Internet. Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. This field is not available if you select Auto Connect in the PPP Connection Trigger field. PPPoE Passthrough This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation. In addition to the Zyxel Devices built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Zyxel Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate. Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP. Click this switch to enable or disable VLAN on this WAN interface. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. 802.1q Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. Enter the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) size for traffic through this connection. IP Address (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv4 IPv6 DualStack in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) VLAN 802.1p MTU MTU PX7511-B0 Users Guide 80 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 17 Network Setting > Broadband > Add/Edit New WAN Interface (Routing Mode) LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP Address Automatically A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address. Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. Gateway IP Address This is available only when you set Encapsulation to IPoE. Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP. This is available only when you set Encapsulation to IPoE. DNS Server (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv4 IPv6 DualStack in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) Select Obtain DNS Info Automically if you want the Zyxel Device to use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP. Select Use Following Static DNS Address if you want the Zyxel Device to use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Routing Feature (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv4 IPv6 DualStack in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) NAT Click this switch to activate or deactivate NAT on this connection. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. IGMP Proxy Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Click this switch to have the Zyxel Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. This allows the Zyxel Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Apply as Default Gateway Click this switch to have the Zyxel Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Fullcone NAT Enable Click this switch to enable or disable full cone NAT on this connection. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. This field is available only when you activate NAT. In full cone NAT, the Zyxel Device maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network. The Zyxel Device also maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the internal IP address and port. DHCPC Options (This is available only when you set Encapsulation to IPoE and select IPv4 Only or IPv4 IPv6 DualStack in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) Request Options Select Option 43 to have the Zyxel Device automatically add vendor specific information in the DHCP packets to request the vendor specific options from the DHCP server. Select Option 121 to have the Zyxel Device push static routes to clients. Sent Options option 60 Select this and enter the device identity you want the Zyxel Device to add in the DHCP discovery packets that go to the DHCP server. Vendor ID Enter the Vendor Class Identifier, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. option 61 Select this and enter any string that identifies the device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 81 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 17 Network Setting > Broadband > Add/Edit New WAN Interface (Routing Mode) LABEL IAID DESCRIPTION Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN connection index number. DUID Enter the hardware type, a time value and the MAC address of the device. option 125 Select this to have the Zyxel Device automatically generate and add vendor specific parameters in the DHCP discovery packets that go to the DHCP server. IPv6 Address (This is available only when you select IPv4 IPv6 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) Obtain an IPv6 Address Automatically Select Obtain an IPv6 Address Automatically if you want to have the Zyxel Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected routers Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address. Static IPv6 Address Select Static IPv6 Address if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP. When you select this, the following fields appear. IPv6 Address Enter an IPv6 IP address that your ISP gave to you for this WAN interface. Prefix Length Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address compose the network address. IPv6 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your Zyxel Device's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. IPv6 DNS Server (This is available only when you select IPv4 IPv6 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field. Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section.) Select Obtain IPv6 DNS Info Automatically to have the Zyxel Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select Use Following Static IPv6 DNS Address to have the Zyxel Device use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. IPv6 Routing Feature (This is available only when you select IPv4 IPv6 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field. You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section.) MLD Proxy Enable Select this check box to have the Zyxel Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows the Zyxel Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Apply as Default Gateway Select this option to have the Zyxel Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. DS-Lite DS-Lite Relay Server IP 6RD This is available only when you select IPv6 Only in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field. Enable Dual Stack Lite to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISPs IPv6 network. See Dual Stack Lite on page 76 for more information. Click this switch to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISPs IPv6 network. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Specify the transition routers IPv6 address. The 6RD (IPv6 rapid deployment) fields display when you set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field to IPv4 Only. See IPv6 Rapid Deployment on page 76 for more information. Click this switch to tunnel IPv6 traffic from the local network through the ISPs IPv4 network. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Obtain IPv6 DNS Info Automatically Use Following Static IPv6 DNS Address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server PX7511-B0 Users Guide 82 Chapter 6 Broadband IPv4 Mask Length Border Relay IPv4 Address Table 17 Network Setting > Broadband > Add/Edit New WAN Interface (Routing Mode) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Manually Configured if you have the IPv4 address of the relay server. Otherwise, select Automatically configured by DHCPC to have the Zyxel Device detect it automatically through DHCP. The Automatically configured by DHCPC option is configurable only when you set the method of encapsulation to IPoE. Service Provider IPv6 Prefix Enter an IPv6 prefix for tunneling IPv6 traffic to the ISPs border relay router and connecting to the native IPv6 Internet. Enter the subnet mask number (1~32) for the IPv4 network. When you select Manually Configured, specify the relay servers IPv4 address in this field. IPv6 IA_PD and IA_NA (This is available only when you select IPv4 IPv6 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) Prefix Delegation Click this switch to use DHCP PD (Prefix Delegation) which enables the Zyxel Device to pass the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is disabled. IPv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server Click this switch to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the Zyxel Device using the IPv6 prefix from a Router Advertisement (RA). When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is disabled. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 6.2.1.2 Bridge Mode Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure. The following example screen displays when you select the Bridge mode. Figure 46 Network Setting > Broadband > Add/Edit New WAN Interface (Bridge Mode) PX7511-B0 Users Guide 83 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 18 Network Setting > Broadband > Add/Edit New WAN Interface (Bridge Mode) DESCRIPTION Click this switch to enable or disable the interface. When the switch goes to the right function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the Enter a service name of the connection. This field shows GPON and indicates a broadband connection to a PON (Passive Optical Network). Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). VLAN Click this switch to enable or disable VLAN on this WAN interface. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. 802.1p IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 0 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. LABEL General Name Type Mode 802.1q Cancel Apply Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes. 6.3 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the Zyxel Device features described in this chapter. Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Zyxel Device can work in bridge mode or routing mode. When the Zyxel Device is in routing mode, it supports the following methods. Encapsulation IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells. PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). PX7511-B0 Users Guide 84 Chapter 6 Broadband One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the Zyxel Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Zyxel Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However, the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway. Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame). The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID

(VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is PX7511-B0 Users Guide 85 Chapter 6 Broadband used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094. TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network -

not everybody and not just 1. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. At start up, the Zyxel Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the Zyxel Device periodically updates this information. DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The Zyxel Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 1 2 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the Zyxel Devices WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 86 Chapter 6 Broadband Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 87 C H A P T E R 7 Wireless 7.1 Wireless Overview This chapter describes the Zyxel Devices Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your Zyxel Devices WiFi connection and security settings. 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This section describes the Zyxel Devices Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your Zyxel Devices wireless connection. Use the General screen to enable WiFi, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode (Section 7.2 on page 89). on page 94). Use the Guest/More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your Zyxel Device (Section 7.3 Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the Zyxel Device (Section 7.4 on page 97). Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) (Section 7.5 on page 99). Use the WMM screen to enable WiFi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications (Section 7.6 on page 100). Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold Use the Channel Status screen to scan WiFi channel noises and view the results (Section 7.8 on page

(Section 7.7 on page 101). 104). 7.1.2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there are a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. Finding Out More See Section 7.9 on page 104 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 88 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.2 Wireless General Settings Use this screen to enable WiFi, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. These are basic elements for starting a wireless service. Its recommended that you select More Secure to enable WPA2-

PSK data encryption. Note: If you are configuring the Zyxel Device from a computer connected to WiFi and you change the Zyxel Devices SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Zyxel Devices new settings. Note: If upstream/downstream bandwidth is empty, the Zyxel Device sets the value automatically. wireless performance. Note: Setting a maximum upstream/downstream bandwidth will significantly decrease Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 89 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 47 Network Setting > Wireless > General PX7511-B0 Users Guide 90 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the general WiFi labels in this screen. Table 19 Network Setting > Wireless > General DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup LABEL Wireless Wireless Band Wireless Channel Select Keep the same settings for 2.4G and 5G wireless networks and the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz wireless networks will use the same SSID and wireless security settings. This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using. 2.4GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ax wireless clients while 5GHz is used by IEEE 802.11a/n/ac/ax wireless clients. Click this switch to enable or disable WiFi in this field. When the switch turns blue function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in. Use Auto to have the Zyxel Device automatically determine a channel to use. Bandwidth Select whether the Zyxel Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz, 40MHz, 20MHz/40MHz, 20MHz/40MHz/80MHz or 20MHz/40MHz/80MHz/160MHz. A standard 20 MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150 Mbps whereas a 40 MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. 40 MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. An 80 MHz channel groups adjacent 40 MHz channels into pairs to increase bandwidth even higher. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. Because not all devices support 40 MHz and/or 160 MHz channels, select 20/40MHz or 20MHz/

40MHz/80MHz/160MHz to allow the Zyxel Device to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically. Control Sideband This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth field to 40MHz or 20MHz/40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Channel field) should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel bands. Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for WiFi. Max Clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time. Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. This check box is grayed out if the WPS function is enabled in the Network Setting > Wireless >

WPS screen. Multicast Forwarding Select this check box to allow the Zyxel Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic. Max. Upstream Bandwidth Max. Upstream Bandwidth allows you to specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this wireless LAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). Max. Upstream Bandwidth allows you to specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this wireless LAN from the WAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Zyxel Device when WiFi is enabled. Max. Downstream Bandwidth Security Level PX7511-B0 Users Guide 91 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 19 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Select More Secure (Recommended) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Zyxel Device. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. Cancel Apply See the following sections for more details about this field. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 7.2.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the Zyxel Device without any data encryption or authentication. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your Zyxel Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 48 Wireless > General: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Wireless > General: No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Choose No Security to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or authentication. 7.2.2 More Secure (Recommended) The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the Zyxel Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be. Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA2-PSK or WPA2-EAP from the Security Mode list. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 92 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 49 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA2-PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA2-PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA2-PSK data encryption. Security Mode Select WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. Generate password automatically Select this option to have the Zyxel Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. Password Select Generate password automatically or enter a Password. The password has two uses. 1. Manual. Manually enter the same password on the Zyxel Device and the client. Enter 8-63 ASCII characters or exactly 64 hexadecimal (0-9, a-f) characters. 2. WPS. When using WPS, the Zyxel Device sends this password to the client. Click the Eye icon to show or hide the password of your wireless network. When the Eye icon is slashed

, youll see the password in plain text. Otherwise, it is hidden. Click this to show more fields in this section. Click again to hide them. Encryption This field shows the AES type of data encryption. Timer The Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 93 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.3 Guest/More AP This screen allows you to configure a guest wireless network that allows access to the Internet only through the Zyxel Device. You can also configure additional wireless networks, each with different security settings, in this screen. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP. The following screen displays. The following table introduces the supported wireless networks. Table 22 Supported Wireless Networks WIRELESS NETWORKS WHERE TO CONFIGURE Main/1 Guest/3 Network Setting > Wireless > General screen Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP screen Figure 50 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 23 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. LABEL

Status SSID This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active, while a gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active. An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Zyxel Devices BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. Guest WLAN This displays if the guest WiFi function has been enabled for this wireless LAN. If Home Guest displays, clients can connect to each other directly. If External Guest displays, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly. N/A displays if guest WLAN is disabled. Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. 7.3.1 The Edit Guest/More AP Screen Use this screen to create Guest and additional wireless networks with different security settings. Note: If upstream/downstream bandwidth is empty, the Zyxel Device sets the value automatically. Setting a maximum upstream/downstream bandwidth will significantly decrease wireless performance. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 94 Chapter 7 Wireless Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the Guest/More AP screen. The following screen displays. Figure 51 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP > Edit PX7511-B0 Users Guide 95 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP > Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Security Level Wireless Click this switch to enable or disable WiFi in this field. When the switch turns blue function is enabled; otherwise, it is not.

, the Wireless Network Name The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for WiFi. Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Guest WLAN Select this to create Guest WiFis for home and external clients. Select the WiFi type in the Access Scenario field. Access Scenario If you select Home Guest, clients can connect to each other directly. If you select External Guest, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly. Max. Upstream Bandwidth Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this wireless LAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). Max. Downstream Bandwidth Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this wireless LAN from the WAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Zyxel Device when WiFi is enabled. SSID Subnet Click on this switch to Enable this function if you want the wireless network interface to assign DHCP IP addresses to the associated wireless clients. This option cannot be used if the WPS function is enabled in the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen or if the Keep the same settings for 2.4G and 5G wireless networks check box is selected in Network Setting > Wireless > General. Specify the first of the contiguous addresses in the DHCP IP address pool. The Zyxel Device assigns IP addresses from this DHCP pool to wireless clients connecting to the SSID. Specify the last of the contiguous addresses in the DHCP IP address pool. Specify the subnet mask of the Zyxel Device for the SSID subnet. Specify the IP address of the Zyxel Device for the SSID subnet. DHCP Start Address DHCP End Address SSID Subnet Mask LAN IP Address Security Level Select More Secure (Recommended) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have the same wireless security settings as the Zyxel Device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. See Section 7.2.1 on page 92 for more details about this field. Security Mode Select WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. Generate password automatically Select this option to have the Zyxel Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 96 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP > Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Password WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. If you did not select Generate password automatically, you can manually type a pre-shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters. Click the Eye icon to show or hide the password of your wireless network. When the Eye icon is slashed

, youll see the password in plain text. Otherwise, it is hidden. Click this to show more fields in this section. Click again to hide them. Encryption This field shows the AES type of data encryption. Timer Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. The Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. 7.4 MAC Authentication This screen allows you to configure the Zyxel Device to give exclusive access to specific devices (Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the Zyxel Device (Deny) based on the device(s) MAC address. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. It is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters; for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the device(s) you want to allow/deny to configure this screen. Note: You can have up to 25 MAC authentication rules. Use this screen to view your Zyxel Devices MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown. Figure 52 Network Setting> Wireless > MAC Authentication PX7511-B0 Users Guide 97 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication DESCRIPTION LABEL General SSID MAC Restrict Mode MAC Address List Add New MAC Address Modify Cancel Apply Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings. Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering. Select Deny to block access to the Zyxel Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the Zyxel Device. Select Allow to permit access to the Zyxel Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Zyxel Device. This field is available when you select Deny or Allow in the MAC Restrict Mode field. Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below.

This is the index number of the entry. MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Zyxel Device. Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format

(six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc). Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 7.4.1 Add/Edit MAC Addresses Click Add new MAC address in the Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication screen to add a new MAC address. You can also click the Edit icon next to a MAC authentication rule to edit the rule. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Zyxel Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Figure 53 Network Setting> Wireless > MAC Authentication > Add/Edit PX7511-B0 Users Guide 98 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.5 WPS Settings WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. To set up a WPS connection between two devices, both devices must support WPS. It is recommended to use the Push Button Configuration (PBC) method if your wireless client supports it. See Section 7.9.8.3 on page 112 for more information about WPS. Note: The Zyxel Device applies the security settings of the main SSID (SSID1) profile (see Section 7.2 on page 89). Note: If WPS is enabled, UPnP will automatically be turned on. Note: The WPS switch is grayed out when WiFi is disabled. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Click this switch and makes it turn blue. Click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen. Figure 54 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS PX7511-B0 Users Guide 99 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS DESCRIPTION LABEL General WPS Method 1 WPS Click this switch to activate or deactivate WPS on this Zyxel Device. When the switch turns blue

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Add a new device with WPS Method Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC). Click this switch to make it turn blue. Click Apply to activate WPS method 1 on the Zyxel Device. Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the Zyxel Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Method 2 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the Zyxel Device. Click this switch and make it turn blue. Click Apply to activate WPS method 2 on the Zyxel Device. Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the Zyxel Device. Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the Zyxel Device into the client. Click this switch and make it turn blue. Click Apply to activate WPS method 3 on the Zyxel Device. Release Configuration The default WPS status is configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the Zyxel Device. Generate New PIN If this method has been enabled, the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the Zyxel Device is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use the WPS push-button method. Click the Generate New PIN button to have the Zyxel Device create a new PIN. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 7.6 WMM Settings Use this screen to enable WiFi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Automatic Power Save (APSD) in wireless networks for multimedia applications. WMM enhances data transmission quality, while APSD improves power management of wireless clients. This allows delay-sensitive applications, such as voice and videos, to run more smoothly. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM to display the following screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 100 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 55 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM Note: WMM cannot be disabled if 802.11 mode includes 802.11n or 802.11ac. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 27 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM LABEL DESCRIPTION WMM of SSID1~4 Select On to have the Zyxel Device automatically give the wireless network (SSIDx) a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (WiFi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. If the 802.11 Mode in Network Setting > Wireless > Others is set to include 802.11n or 802.11ac, WMM cannot be disabled. WMM Automatic Power Save Delivery (APSD) Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices (especially useful for small devices that are running multimedia applications). The Zyxel Device goes to sleep mode to save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the Zyxel Device until the Zyxel Device "wakes up". The Zyxel Device wakes up periodically to check for incoming data. Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the Zyxel Device is connected also supports this feature. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 7.7 Others Settings Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings, such as additional security settings, power saving, and data transmission settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Others. The screen appears as shown. See Section 7.9.2 on page 106 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 101 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 56 Network Setting > Wireless > Others The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Others DESCRIPTION LABEL RTS/CTS Threshold Fragmentation Threshold Output Power Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake. Enter a value between 0 and 2347. This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346. Set the output power of the Zyxel Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or 100%. Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from 50 ms to 1000 ms. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point. DTIM Interval Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 255. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 102 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Others (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION 802.11 Mode For 2.4 GHz frequency WiFi devices:

Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. Zyxel Device. Zyxel Device. Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. The transmission rate of your Zyxel Device might be reduced. Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11n compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. The transmission rate of your Zyxel Device might be reduced. Select 802.11b/g/n/ax Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n or IEEE 802.11ax compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. The transmission rate of your Zyxel Device might be reduced. For 5 GHz frequency WiFi devices:

Select 802.11a Only to allow only IEEE 802.11a compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Select 802.11ac Only to allow only IEEE 802.11ac compliant WiFi devices to associate with Zyxel Device. Zyxel Device. the Zyxel Device. Select 802.11a/n Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11a or IEEE 802.11n compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. The transmission rate of your Zyxel Device might be reduced. Select 802.11n/ac Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11n or IEEE 802.11ac compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. The transmission rate of your Zyxel Device might be reduced. Select 802.11a/n/ac Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11n or IEEE 802.11ac compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. The transmission rate of your Zyxel Device might be reduced. Select 802.11a/n/ac/ax Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11ac or IEEE 802.11ax compliant WiFi devices to associate with the Zyxel Device. The transmission rate of your Zyxel Device might be reduced. 802.11 Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic). Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance. Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your Zyxel Device might be reduced in a mixed-mode network. This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b Only. Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Short. See Section 7.9.7 on page 109 for more information. This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b or 802.11b/g Mixed. Protected Management Frames This option is only available when using WPA2-PSK as the Security Mode and AES Encryption in Network Setting > Wireless > General. Management frame protection (MFP) helps prevent wireless DoS attacks. Select Disable if you do not want to use MFP. Select Capable to encrypt management frames of wireless clients that support MFP. Clients that do not support MFP will still be allowed to join the wireless network, but remain unprotected. Select Required to allow only clients that support MFP to join the wireless network. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 103 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.8 Channel Status Settings Use the Channel Status screen to scan WiFi channel noises and view the results. Click Network Setting >

Wireless > Channel Status. The screen appears as shown. Click Scan to scan the wireless LAN channels. You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section. Note: If the current channel is a DFS channel, the warning Channel scan process is denied because current channel is a DFS channel (Channel: 52~140). If you want to run channel scan, please select a non-DFS channel and try again. appears. Figure 57 Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status 7.9 Technical Reference This section discusses WiFis in depth. For more information, see Appendix B on page 283. 7.9.1 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 104 Chapter 7 Wireless An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 58 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your Zyxel Device is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 105 Chapter 7 Wireless Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Zyxel Devices Web Configurator. 7.9.2 Additional Wireless Terms Table 29 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each others presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the Zyxel Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Zyxel Device. Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes:

long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Zyxel Device does, it cannot communicate with the Zyxel Device. Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. Fragmentation Threshold A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. 7.9.3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 106 Chapter 7 Wireless These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess -

for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 7.9.3.1 SSID Normally, the Zyxel Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the Zyxel Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 7.9.3.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Zyxel Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 1. 2. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 107 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.9.3.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 7.9.3.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 7.9.4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. 7.9.5 BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-

BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 108 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 59 Basic Service set 7.9.6 MBSSID Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The Zyxel Devices MBSSID

(Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 7.9.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs (they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. 7.9.7 Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 109 Chapter 7 Wireless Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the Zyxel Device uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. 7.9.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Your Zyxel Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 7.9.8.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 2 3 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the Zyxel Device, see Section 7.6 on page 100). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the Zyxel Device you must press the WPS button for more than five seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through a secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 110 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.9.8.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router

(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. 2 Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. 3 4 5 6 7 Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the Zyxel Device, see Section 7.5 on page 99). Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 111 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 60 Example WPS Process: PIN Method 7.9.8.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP

(Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA2-PSK randomly. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 112 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 61 How WPS works The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 7.9.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 113 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 62 WPS: Example Network Step 1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 63 WPS: Example Network Step 2 In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 114 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 64 WPS: Example Network Step 3 7.9.8.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access PX7511-B0 Users Guide 115 Chapter 7 Wireless point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 116 C H A P T E R 8 Home Networking 8.1 Home Networking Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. Figure 65 Home Networking Example 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your Zyxel Device (Section 8.2 on page 119). Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses (Section 8.3 on page 123). Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the Zyxel Device (Section 8.4 on page 125). Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP (Section 8.5 on page 130). Use the STB Vendor ID screen to configure the Vendor IDs of the connected Set Top Box (STB) devices, which have the Zyxel Device automatically create static DHCP entries for the STB devices when they request IP addresses (Section 8.6 on page 132). Use the Wake on LAN screen to remotely turn on a device on the network. (Section 8.7 on page 133). Use the TFTP Server Name screen to identify a TFTP server for configuration file download using DHCP option 66. (Section 8.8 on page 133). 8.1.2 What You Need To Know 8.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, and so on) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 117 8.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices Chapter 8 Home Networking Subnet Mask DHCP DNS Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your Zyxel Device an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it is turned on. DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it. RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation (RS) request to discover the available routers, RADVD with Router Advertisement (RA) messages in response to the request. It specifies the minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts. RA messages containing the address prefix. IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address. UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows 10). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the Chapter 11 on page 165 for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 118 Chapter 8 Home Networking When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the Zyxel Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and Zyxel Zyxel has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). Zyxel's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See Section 8.4.1 on page 126 for examples of installing and using UPnP. See Section 8.9 on page 134 for technical background information on LANs. Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. Finding Out More 8.1.3 Before You Begin 8.2 LAN Setup Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Zyxel Device. Configure DHCP settings to have the Zyxel Device or a DHCP server assign IP addresses to devices. Click Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen. Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings. 1 2 Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation. This will become the IP address of your Zyxel Device. Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 119 Chapter 8 Home Networking 3 Click Apply to save your settings. Figure 66 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup PX7511-B0 Users Guide 120 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Group Group Name LAN IP Setup IP Address Subnet Mask IGMP Snooping DHCP Server State DHCP Relay Server Address IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address Ending IP Address Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter 15 on page 192 for how to create a new interface group. Enter the LAN IPv4 IP address you want to assign to your Zyxel Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0

(factory default). Your Zyxel Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. Active Select Enable to allow the Zyxel Device to passively learn multicast group. IGMP Mode Select Standard Mode to forward multicast packets to a port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports. Select Blocking Mode to block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN. DHCP Select Enable to have the Zyxel Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent. Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the Zyxel Device. Select DHCP Relay to have the Zyxel Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server. This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field. IP Address Enter the IPv4 IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. Auto reserve IP for the same host Click this switch to have the Zyxel Device record DHCP IP addresses with the MAC addresses the IP addresses are assigned to. When the switch goes to the right Otherwise, it is not.

, the function is enabled. The Zyxel Device assigns the same IP address to the same MAC address when the host requests an IP address again through DHCP. DHCP Server Lease Time This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. Days/Hours/

Minutes Enter the lease time of the DHCP server. DNS Values This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your DNS service provider (From ISP). Select DNS Proxy if you have the DNS proxy service. The Zyxel Device redirects clients DNS queries to a DNS server for resolving domain names. Select Static if you have the static DNS service. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 121 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION DNS Server 1/2 Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP addresses the Zyxel Device passes to the DHCP clients. LAN IPv6 Mode Setup IPv6 Active Link Local Address Type EUI64 Manual EUI64 Manual LAN Global Identifier Type LAN IPv6 Prefix Setup Click this switch to enable or disable the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the Zyxel Device. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Select this to have the Zyxel Device generate an interface ID for the LAN interfaces link-local address using the EUI-64 format. Select this to manually enter an interface ID for the LAN interfaces link-local address. Select this to have the Zyxel Device generate an interface ID using the EUI-64 format for its global address. Select this to manually enter an interface ID for the LAN interfaces global IPv6 address. Delegate prefix from WAN Select this option and specify a WAN interface (connection) through which the Zyxel Device automatically obtains an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider or an uplink router. Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 prefix for the Zyxel Devices LAN IPv6 address. MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. Active Click this switch to enable or disable MLD Snooping on the Zyxel Device. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. This allows the Zyxel Device to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic. MLD Mode Select Standard Mode to forward multicast packets to a port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports. LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup LAN IPv6 DNS Assign Setup Select Blocking Mode to block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN. Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address:

Stateless: The Zyxel Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) is enabled to have the Zyxel Device send IPv6 prefix information in router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations. DHCPv6 server is disabled. Stateful: The Zyxel Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. The DHCPv6 server is enabled to have the Zyxel Device act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6 addresses to DHCPv6 clients. Select how the Zyxel Device provide DNS server and domain name information to the clients:

From Router Advertisement: The Zyxel Device provides DNS information through router advertisements. From DHCPv6 Server: The Zyxel Device provides DNS information through DHCPv6. From RA & DHCPv6 Server: The Zyxel Device provides DNS information through both router advertisements and DHCPv6. DHCPv6 Configuration DHCPv6 Active This shows the status of the DHCPv6. DHCPv6 Server displays if you configured the Zyxel Device to act as a DHCPv6 server which assigns IPv6 addresses and/or DNS information to clients. IPv6 Router Advertisement State RADVD Active This shows whether RADVD is enabled or not. IPv6 Address Values This section is available only when you select Stateful in the LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup field. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 122 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) DESCRIPTION Enter the first of the contiguous addresses in the IPv6 address pool. Enter the last of the contiguous addresses in the IPv6 address pool. Enter the domain name that is assigned to DHCPv6 clients. LABEL IPv6 Start Address IPv6 End Address IPv6 Domain Name IPv6 DNS Values IPv6 DNS Server 1-3 DNS Query Scenario Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information. Select User-Defined if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server IPv6 addresses the Zyxel Device passes to the DHCP clients. Select None if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers. Select how the Zyxel Device handles clients DNS information requests. IPv4/IPv6 DNS Server: The Zyxel Device forwards the requests to both the IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers and sends clients the first DNS information it receives. IPv6 DNS Server Only: The Zyxel Device forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server and sends clients the DNS information it receives. IPv4 DNS Server Only: The Zyxel Device forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server and sends clients the DNS information it receives. IPv6 DNS Server First: The Zyxel Device forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server first and then the IPv4 DNS server. Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives. IPv4 DNS Server First: The Zyxel Device forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server first and then the IPv6 DNS server. Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 8.3 LAN Static DHCP This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to individual computers based on their MAC addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Use this screen to change your Zyxel Devices static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen. Figure 67 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP PX7511-B0 Users Guide 123 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new static DHCP entry. Static DHCP Configuration

Status MAC Address This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the client is connected to the Zyxel Device. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Modify Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it. Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry. If you click Static DHCP Configuration in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry, the following screen displays. Using a static DHCP means a client will always have the same IP address assigned to it by the DHCP server. Assign a fixed IP address to a device by selecting the interface group of this device and its IP address type and selecting the device/computer from a list or manually entering its MAC address and assigned IP address. Figure 68 Static DHCP: Static DHCP Configuration/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Static DHCP: Static DHCP Configuration/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Click this switch to enable or disable the connection between the client and the Zyxel Device. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings. See Chapter 15 on page 192 for how to create a new interface group. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 124 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 32 Static DHCP: Static DHCP Configuration/Edit (continued) LABEL IP Type DESCRIPTION This field displays IPv4 for the type of the DHCP IP address. At the time of writing, it is not allowed to select other type. Select Device Info Select a device or computer from the drop-down list or select Manual Input to manually enter a devices MAC address and IP address in the following fields. MAC Address If you select Manual Input, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. If you select Manual Input, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. IP Address Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 8.4 UPnP Settings Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities, and learn about other devices on the network. A device can then leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See Section 8.4.1 on page 126 for more information on UPnP. Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Zyxel Device. Click Network Setting >

Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Note: To use UPnP NAT-T, enable NAT in the Network Setting > Broadband > Edit/Add New WAN Interface screen. Figure 69 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP PX7511-B0 Users Guide 125 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION UPnP State UPnP UPnP NAT-T State UPnP NAT-T Click this switch to enable or disable UPnP. When the switch goes to the right is enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the function Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the Web Configurator's login screen without entering the Zyxel Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the Web Configurator). Click this switch to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Zyxel Device so that they can communicate through the Zyxel Device by using NAT traversal. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. The table below displays the NAT port forwarding rules added automatically by UPnP NAT-T.

This is the index number of the UPnP NAT-T connection. Description This is the description of the UPnP NAT-T connection. Destination IP Address This is the IP address of the other connected UPnP-enabled device. External Port This is the external port number that identifies the service. Internal Port This is the internal port number that identifies the service. Protocol Cancel Apply This is the transport layer protocol used for the service. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 8.4.1 Turning on UPnP in Windows 7 Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows 7. UPnP server is installed in Windows 7. Activate UPnP on the Zyxel Device in Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Zyxel Device. Turn on your computer and the Zyxel Device. 1 Click the start icon, Control Panel and then the Network and Sharing Center. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 126 Chapter 8 Home Networking 2 Click Change Advanced Sharing Settings. 3 Select Turn on network discovery and click Save Changes. Network discovery allows your computer to find other computers and devices on the network and other computers on the network to find your computer. This makes it easier to share files and printers. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 127 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.4.2 Turning on UPnP in Windows 10 Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows 10. UPnP server is installed in Windows 10. Activate UPnP on the Zyxel Device in Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP. Make sure the computer is connected to the LAN port of the Zyxel Device. Turn on your computer and the Zyxel Device. 1 Click the start icon, Settings and then Network & Internet. 2 Click Network and Sharing Center. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 128 Chapter 8 Home Networking 3 Click Change advanced sharing settings. 4 Under Domain, select Turn on network discovery and click Save Changes. Network discovery allows your computer to find other computers and devices on the network and other computers on the network to find your computer. This makes it easier to share files and printers. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 129 8.5 LAN Additional Subnet Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP. IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The Zyxel Device supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet interface Chapter 8 Home Networking PX7511-B0 Users Guide 130 Chapter 8 Home Networking with the Zyxel Device itself as the gateway for the LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet). If your ISP provides the Public LAN service, the Zyxel Device may use a LAN IP address that can be accessed from the WAN. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet to display the screen shown next. Figure 70 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias Setup Group Name Active Subnet Mask Public LAN Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings. See Chapter 15 on page 192 for how to create a new interface group. Click this switch to configure a LAN network for the Zyxel Device. When the switch goes to the right

, the following fields will be configurable. Otherwise, they are not. IPv4 Address Enter the IP address of your Zyxel Device in dotted decimal notation. Your Zyxel Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IPv4 address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use this value computed by the Zyxel Device. Active Click this switch to enable or disable the Public LAN feature. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Your ISP must support Public LAN and static IP. IPv4 Address Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP. Subnet Mask Enter the public IPv4 subnet mask provided by your ISP. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 131 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Offer Public IP by DHCP Click this switch to enable or disable the Zyxel Device to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Enable ARP Proxy Click this switch to enable or disable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) proxy. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 8.6 STB Vendor ID Use this screen to configure the Vendor IDs of connected Set Top Boxes (STBs) so the Zyxel Device can automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP addresses. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen. Figure 71 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID LABEL DESCRIPTION Vendor ID 1~5 These are STBs Vendor Class Identifiers (DHCP option 60). A Vendor Class Identifier is usually used to inform the DHCP server a DHCP clients vendor and functionality. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 132 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.7 Wake on LAN Wake on LAN (WoL) allows you to remotely turn on a device on the network, such as a computer, storage device or media server. To use this feature the remote hardware (for example the network adapter on a computer) must support Wake On LAN using the Magic Packet method. You need to know the MAC address of the LAN device. It may be on a label on the device or in its documentation. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Wake on LAN to open this screen. Figure 72 Network Setting > Home Networking > Wake on LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > Wake on LAN DESCRIPTION LABEL Wake by Address Select Manual Input and enter the IP address or MAC address of the device to turn it on remotely. The drop-down list also lists the IP addresses that can be found in the Zyxel Devices ARP table. If you select an IP address, the MAC address of the device with the selected IP address then displays in the MAC Address field. IP Address Enter the IPv4 IP address of the device to turn it on. This field is not available if you select an IP address in the Wake by Address field. MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the device to turn it on. A MAC address consists of six hexadecimal character pairs. Wake up Click this to send a WoL magic packet to wake up the specified device. 8.8 TFTP Server Name Use the TFTP Server Name screen to identify a TFTP server for configuration file download using DHCP option 66. RFC 2132 defines the option 66 open standard. DHCP option 66 supports the IP address or the host name of a single TFTP server. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 133 Chapter 8 Home Networking Click Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name to open this screen. Figure 73 Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address or the host name of a single TFTP server. TFTP Server Name Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 8.9 Technical Reference 8.9.1 LANs, WANs and the Zyxel Device This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. The actual physical connection determines whether the Zyxel Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 74 LAN and WAN IP Addresses PX7511-B0 Users Guide 134 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.9.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Zyxel Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Zyxel Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. IP Pool Setup The Zyxel Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 8.9.3 DNS Server Addresses 8.9.4 LAN TCP/IP DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen. Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Zyxel Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen. The Zyxel Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and PX7511-B0 Users Guide 135 Chapter 8 Home Networking you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Zyxel Device. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Zyxel Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Zyxel Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You do not need to change the subnet mask computed by the Zyxel Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 136 C H A P T E R 9 Routing 9.1 Overview The Zyxel Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the Zyxel Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Zyxel Devices LAN interface. The Zyxel Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Zyxel Devices default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 75 Example of Routing Topology 9.2 Static Route Settings Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the Zyxel Device. A static route is used to save time and bandwidth usage when LAN devices within an Intranet are transferring files or packets, especially when there are more than two Internet connections available in your home or office network. Click Network Setting > Routing > Static Route to open the following screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 137 Chapter 9 Routing Figure 76 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new static route. Add New Static Route

Status Destination IP Subnet Mask/

Prefix Length Gateway This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active. Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Interface This is the WAN interface used for this static route. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the Zyxel Device. Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the Zyxel Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new static route in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Note: The Gateway IP Address must be within the range of the selected interface in Use Interface. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 138 Chapter 9 Routing Figure 77 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Route Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route. IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6. Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination. Click this switch to enable or disable this static route. When the switch goes to the right function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here. Use Gateway IP Address The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Click this switch to enable or disable the gateway IP address. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Enter the IP address of the gateway. Use Interface Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click Apply to save your changes. Destination IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Cancel Apply PX7511-B0 Users Guide 139 Chapter 9 Routing 9.3 DNS Route Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Zyxel Device. A DNS route entry defines a policy for the Zyxel Device to forward a particular DNS query to a specific WAN interface. Note: A maximum of 20 DNS routes can be added. Click Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route to open the following screen. Figure 78 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new DNS route. Add New DNS Route

Status This is the index number of a DNS route. This field displays whether the DNS route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this DNS route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this DNS route is not active. Domain Name This is the host name or domain name of the DNS route entry. WAN Interface This is the WAN connection through which the Zyxel Device forwards DNS requests for this domain name. Subnet Mask This is the subnet mask of the DNS route entry. Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the DNS route. Click the Delete icon to delete the DNS route. 9.3.1 Add DNS Route You can manually add the Zyxel Devices DNS route entry. Click Add New DNS Route in the Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route screen. The screen shown next appears. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 140 Chapter 9 Routing Figure 79 DNS Route Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 DNS Route Add DESCRIPTION LABEL Active Domain Name Enter the domain name of the DNS route entry. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the DNS route entry. Click this switch to enable or disable the DNS route. When the switch goes to the right function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the WAN Interface Select the WAN connection through which the Zyxel Device forwards DNS requests for this domain name. ETHWAN means the wireless cellular interface. Cancel OK Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes. Click this to save your changes. 9.4 Policy Route Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the Zyxel Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Policy routes allow the Zyxel Device to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-

based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing. You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing. The Policy Route screen let you view and configure routing policies on the Zyxel Device. Click Network Setting > Routing > Policy Route to open the following screen. Figure 80 Network Setting > Routing > Policy Route PX7511-B0 Users Guide 141 Chapter 9 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 Network Setting > Routing > Policy Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Policy Route

Status Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule. This is the index number of the entry. Name This is the name of the rule. Source IP This is the source IP address. Source Subnet Mask This is the source subnet mask address. Protocol This is the transport layer protocol. Source Port This is the source port number. Source MAC This is the source MAC address. This field displays whether the DNS route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this DNS route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this DNS route is not active. Source Interface This is the interface from which the matched traffic is sent. WAN Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this policy. Click the Delete icon to remove a policy from the Zyxel Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the policy. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 142 Chapter 9 Routing 9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Route Click Add New Policy Route in the Policy Route screen or click the Edit icon next to a policy. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route. Figure 81 Policy Route: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Policy Route: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Active Click this switch to enable or disable the policy route. When the switch goes to the right function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the Route Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces. Source IP Address Source Subnet Mask Enter the source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask address. Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP). Source Port Enter the source port number. Source MAC Enter the source MAC address. Source Interface

(ex: br0 or LAN1~LAN4) Type the name of the interface from which the matched traffic is sent. WAN Interface This field shows ETHWAN as the WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 143 Chapter 9 Routing 9.5 RIP Settings Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing information with other routers. Click Network Setting > Routing > RIP to open the RIP screen. Figure 82 Network Setting > Routing > RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Network Setting > Routing > RIP DESCRIPTION LABEL

Version This is the index of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Zyxel Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information. RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Operation Select Passive to have the Zyxel Device update the routing table based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface. Select Active to have the Zyxel Device advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers. Enable Select the check box to activate the settings. Disable Default Gateway Select the check box to set the Zyxel Device to not send the route information to the default gateway. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 144 C H A P T E R 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.1 QoS Overview Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical applications such as video-on-demand. Configure QoS on the Zyxel Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:

1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows. 2 Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. The Zyxel Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. There are eight priority levels, with 1 having the highest priority. This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section 10.3 on page 147). 10.6 on page 156). page 157). The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 10.4 on page 149). The Classification Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 10.5 on page 151). The Shaper Setup screen limits outgoing traffic transmission rate on the selected interface (Section The Policer Setup screen lets you control incoming traffic transmission rate and bursts (Section 10.7 on PX7511-B0 Users Guide 145 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. QoS versus CoS QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. Traffic Shaping Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your Zyxel Device uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time

(Before Traffic Shaping)

(After Traffic Shaping) PX7511-B0 Users Guide 146 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time

(Before Traffic Policing)

(After Traffic Policing) The Zyxel Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 10.8 on page 160 for more information on each metering algorithm. 10.3 Quality of Service General Settings Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth or assign traffic priority. See Section 10.1 on page 145 for more information. When one of the following situations happens, the current WAN linkup rate will be used instead:

1 WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth is set to 0 2 WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth is empty 3 WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth is higher than the current WAN interface linkup rate Note: Manually defined QoS is ignored when Upstream Traffic Priority is selected. Note: Upstream Traffic Priority automatically assigns a traffic priority level based on the selected criteria. Note: To have your QoS settings configured in other QoS screens take effect, select None in the Upstream Traffic Priority Assigned by field. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 147 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Figure 83 Network > QoS > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 45 Network Setting > QoS > General DESCRIPTION LABEL QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interfaces speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps. You can set this number higher than the interfaces actual transmission speed. The Zyxel Device uses up to 95% of the DSL ports actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL ports actual transmission speed. You can also set this number lower than the interfaces actual transmission speed. This will cause the Zyxel Device to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the Zyxel Device automatically sets this number to be 95% of the WAN interfaces actual upstream transmission speed. Select how the Zyxel Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows. None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the Zyxel Device put packets into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority. Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level. IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header. Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, Internet gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers. Upstream traffic priority Assigned by Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 148 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.4 Queue Setup Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment to decide the priority on WAN/LAN interfaces. Traffic with higher priority gets through faster than those with lower priority. Low-priority traffic is dropped first when the network is congested. Note: Configure the priority level for a QoS queue from 1 to 8. The smaller the number in the Priority column, the higher the priority. Note: The corresponding classifier(s) will be removed automatically if a queue is deleted. Note: Rate limit 0 means there's no rate limit on a queue. Figure 84 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new queue entry. This is the index number of the entry. LABEL Add New Queue

Status Priority Weight This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active. Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue. Interface This shows the name of the Zyxel Devices interface through which traffic in this queue passes. This shows the priority of this queue. The lower the number, the higher the priority level. This shows the weight of this queue. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 149 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Buffer Management This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue. Queue management algorithms determine how the Zyxel Device should handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion). Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue. Rate limit 0 means there's no rate limit on this queue. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Click Add New Queue or the Edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue. Figure 85 Queue Setup: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Queue Setup: Add DESCRIPTION LABEL Active Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue. Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied. This field is read-only if you are editing the queue. Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue. Click this switch to enable or disable the queue. When the switch turns blue enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the function is The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 150

Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 47 Queue Setup: Add (continued) LABEL Weight DESCRIPTION Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the Zyxel Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. Buffer Management This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management algorithm that allows the Zyxel Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again (packets are transmitted out of it). Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue. If you enter 0 here, this means there's no rate limit on this queue. Rate Limit Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 10.5 QoS Classification Setup Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. You can give different priorities to traffic that the Zyxel Device forwards through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup to open the following screen. Figure 86 Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new classifier. Add New Classification Order Status This is the index number of the entry. The classifiers are applied in order of their numbering. This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active. Class Name This is the name of the classifier. Classification Criteria This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 151 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 48 Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier. 802.1P Mark This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier. VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier. To Queue Modify This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put. Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Click Add New Classification in the Classification Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open the following screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 152 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Figure 87 Classification Setup: Add/Edit PX7511-B0 Users Guide 153 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Classification Setup: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Step1: Class Configuration Active Click this switch to enable or disable the classifier. When the switch turns blue is enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the function Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces. Classification Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply. Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list. Step2: Criteria Configuration Basic From Interface If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From Interface drop-down list box. Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic. If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type. If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level. Source Address Destination Address Others Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Subnet Mask Enter the source subnet mask. Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Subnet Mask Enter the source subnet mask. Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 154 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 49 Classification Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Service This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the filter fields. IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number. DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a DHCP option. If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. If you select Client ID (DHCP Option 61), enter the Identity Association IDentifier (IAD Option 61) of the matched traffic, such as the MAC address of the device. If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the users category or application type in the matched DHCP packets. If you select Vendor Specific Info (DHCP Option 125), enter the vendor specific information of the matched traffic, such as the product class, model name, and serial number of the device. IP Packet Length This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in the fields provided. DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. 802.1P This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.

"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number. TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge) flag. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Step3: Packet Modification DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select Remark, enter a DSCP value with which the Zyxel Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the Zyxel Device keep the DSCP field in the packets. VLAN ID If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the Zyxel Device replaces the VLAN ID of the frames. If you select Remove, the Zyxel Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out. If you select Add, the Zyxel Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID. If you select Unchange, the Zyxel Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 155 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 49 Classification Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION 802.1P Mark Select a priority level with which the Zyxel Device replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the Zyxel Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets. Step4: Class Routing Forward to Interface Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the Zyxel Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table. Step5: Outgoing Queue Selection To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class. You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 10.6 QoS Shaper Setup This screen lets you use the token bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts of traffic while keeping most outgoing traffic at the average rate. Click Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup. The screen appears as shown. Figure 88 Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup LABEL Add New Shaper

Status DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the shaper is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this shaper is not active. Interface This shows the name of the Zyxel Device's interface through which traffic in this shaper applies. Rate Limit This shows the average rate limit of traffic bursts for this shaper. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the shaper. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing shaper. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 156 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Shaper Click Add New Shaper in the Shaper Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a shaper to show the following screen. Figure 89 Shaper Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 51 Shaper Setup: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Active Interface Rate Limit Cancel OK Click this switch to enable or disable the shaper. When the switch turns blue enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the function is Select a Zyxel Device's interface through which traffic in this shaper applies. Enter the average rate limit of traffic bursts for this shaper. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 10.7 QoS Policer Setup Use this screen to view QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic and apply actions, such as drop, pass, or modify, to the DSCP value of matched traffic. Click Network Setting

> QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown. Figure 90 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup PX7511-B0 Users Guide 157 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Policer Click this to create a new entry. This is the index number of the entry.

Status Regulated Classes Rule Action This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active. Name This field displays the descriptive name of this policer. This field displays the name of a QoS classifier Meter Type This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer. These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the member QoS classes. This shows how the policer has the Zyxel Device treat different types of traffic belonging to the policers member QoS classes. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the policer. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.7.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer Click Add New Policer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the following screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 158 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Figure 91 Policer Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Policer Setup: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Active Click this switch to enable or disable the policer. When the switch turns blue enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the function is Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer. Meter Type This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer. The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size. The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR), the Committed Burst Size

(CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS). The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). Committed Rate Committed Burst Size Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic. Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also configured. This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 159 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 53 Policer Setup: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Excess Burst Size Specify the additional amount of bytes that are admitted at the committed rate besides the committed burst size. This is the maximum size of the second token bucket in the srTCM. Peak Rate Specify the maximum rate at which packets are admitted to the network. The peak rate should be greater than or equal to the committed rate. This is to specify how many bytes of tokens are added to the second bucket every second in the trTCM. Peak Burst Size Specify the maximum amount of bytes that are admitted at the committed rate. This is the maximum size of the second token bucket in the trTCM. Conforming Action Specify what the Zyxel Device does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (green-

marked packets). Pass: Send the packets without modification. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. Specify the action that the Zyxel Device takes on yellow-marked packets. Partial Conforming Action Non-

Conforming Action Select Pass to forward the packets. Select Drop to discard the packets. Select DSCP Mark to assign a specified DSCP number (between 0 and 63) to the packets and forward them. The packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network. Specify what the Zyxel Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and burst size (red-marked packets). Drop: Discard the packets. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network. Available Class Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier. Selected Class Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move it to the Selected Class box. To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the < button. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 10.8 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the Zyxel Device features described in this chapter. IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 160 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 54 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic. Level 7 Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types. DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There PX7511-B0 Users Guide 161 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the Zyxel Device, the Zyxel Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the Zyxel Device. On the Zyxel Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 55 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping PRIORITY QUEUE LAYER 2 LAYER 3 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY (ETHERNET PRIORITY) TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) IP PACKET LENGTH

(BYTE)

>1100 250~1100

<250 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DSCP 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 162 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Token Bucket The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:

A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from If there are no tokens in the bucket, the Zyxel Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are If not enough tokens are available, the Zyxel Device treats the packet in either one of the following Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket. the bucket. generated. ways:

In traffic shaping:

In traffic policing:

Drops it. is overloaded. Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The Zyxel Device may drop these marked packets if the network Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interfaces capability. The smaller the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps. Single Rate Three Color Marker The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate (CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS). The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate (CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS). All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green. Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:

A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). PX7511-B0 Users Guide 163 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket. If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the Zyxel Device checks the EBS bucket. The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. Two Rate Three Color Marker The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client. The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively. All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the CIR then it is marked green. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:

A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the Zyxel Device checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 164 C H A P T E R 11 Network Address Translation

(NAT) 11.1 NAT Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Zyxel Device. NAT (Network Address Translation -

NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet; for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network, to a different IP address known within another network. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 11.2 on page 166). Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the Zyxel Devices trigger port settings (Section Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 11.4 on page 173). Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the ALGs in the Zyxel Device (Section 11.5 on page 174). Use the Address Mapping screen to configure the Zyxel Device's address mapping settings (Section Use the Sessions screen to configure the Zyxel Device's maximum number of NAT sessions (Section 11.1.2 What You Need To Know Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Zyxel Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN PX7511-B0 Users Guide 165 11.3 on page 170). 11.6 on page 175). 11.6 on page 175). Inside/Outside Global/Local NAT Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. Port Forwarding Finding Out More See Section 11.8 on page 178 for advanced technical information on NAT. 11.2 Port Forwarding Use Port Forwarding to forward incoming service requests from the Internet to the server(s) on your local network. Port forwarding is commonly used when you want to host online gaming, P2P file sharing, or other servers on your network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix C on page 322. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: TCP port 7547 is reserved for system use. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes

(such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 166 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Figure 92 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example IP Address assigned by ISP Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. Figure 93 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 56 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Rule Click this to add a new rule. This is the index number of the entry.

Status This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. Service Name This shows the services name. Originating IP This field displays the source IP address from the WAN interface. WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. This is the servers IP address. Server IP Address Start Port End Port Translation Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service. This is the last external port number that identifies a service. This is the first internal port number that identifies a service. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 167 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 56 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the last internal port number that identifies a service. Translation End Port Protocol Modify This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding Click Add New Rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen. Specify either a port or a range of ports, a server IP address, and a protocol to configure a port forwarding rule. Note: To configure port forwarding, you need to have the same configurations in the Start Port, End Port, Translation Start Port, and Translation End Port fields. Note: To configure port translation, you need to have different configurations in the Start Port, End Port, Translation Start Port, and Translation End Port fields. Note: TCP port 7547 is reserved for system use. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 168 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Figure 94 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Active Click this switch to enable or disable the rule. When the switch goes to the right function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not.

, the Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). Obtain WAN IP Automatically Select the Enable check box to have the Zyxel Device automatically detect and use an available WAN interface for port forwarding. WAN Interface This field is NOT available if you select the Enable check box. Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 169 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 57 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field. End Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above. Translation Start Port This shows the port number to which you want the Zyxel Device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated. Translation End Port Server IP Address Configure Originating IP Originating IP Protocol Cancel OK This shows the last port of the translated port range. Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here. Select Enable to enter the source IP address of WAN interface. Enter the source IP address of WAN interface. Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 11.3 Port Triggering Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding, you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding addresses this problem. Trigger port forwarding allows computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The Zyxel Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the Zyxel Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol

("open" port), the Zyxel Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. Note: TCP port 7547 is reserved for system use. Note: The maximum number of trigger ports for a single rule or all rules is 999. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 170 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Note: The maximum number of open ports for a single rule or all rules is 999. For example:

Figure 95 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example 1 2 3 4 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the Zyxel Device to record Janes computer IP address. The Zyxel Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170. The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. The Zyxel Device forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The Zyxel Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen. Use this screen to view your Zyxel Devices trigger port settings. Figure 96 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering PX7511-B0 Users Guide 171 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Rule Click this to create a new rule. This is the index number of the entry.

Status This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule. WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. Trigger Start Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Zyxel Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. This is the first port number that identifies a service. Trigger End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service. Trigger Proto. This is the trigger transport layer protocol. Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The Zyxel Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. This is the first port number that identifies a service. Open End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service. Open Proto. This is the open transport layer protocol. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 11.3.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering screen or click a rules Edit icon to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a port or range of ports and protocols for sending out requests and for receiving responses. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 172 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Figure 97 Port Triggering: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select Enable or Disable to activate or deactivate the rule. Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules. Trigger Start Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Zyxel Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Trigger End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The Zyxel Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 11.4 DMZ Settings A client in the Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) is no longer behind the Zyxel Device and therefore can run any Internet applications such as video conferencing and Internet gaming without restrictions. This, however, may pose a security threat to the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 173 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Note: Use an IPv4 address for the DMZ server. Note: Enter the IP address of the default server in the Default Server Address field, and click Apply to active the DMZ host. Otherwise, clear the IP address in the Default Server Address field, and click Apply to deactivate the DMZ host. Figure 98 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 60 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Address Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the Zyxel Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 11.5 ALG Settings Application Layer Gateway (ALG) allows customized NAT traversal filters to support address and port translation for certain applications such as File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), or file transfer in Instant Messaging (IM) applications. It allows SIP calls to pass through the Zyxel Device. When the Zyxel Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the Zyxel Devices private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your Zyxel Device is behind a SIP ALG. Use this screen to enable and disable the ALGs in the Zyxel Device. To access this screen, click Network Setting > NAT > ALG. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 174 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Figure 99 Network Setting > NAT > ALG The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > ALG DESCRIPTION LABEL NAT ALG SIP ALG RTSP ALG PPTP ALG IPSEC ALG Cancel Apply Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules. Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules. Enable this to have the Zyxel Device detect RTSP traffic and help build RTSP sessions through its NAT. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. Enable this to turn on the PPTP ALG on the Zyxel Device to detect PPTP traffic and help build PPTP sessions through the Zyxel Devices NAT. Enable this to turn on the IPsec ALG on the Zyxel Device to detect IPsec traffic and help build IPsec sessions through the Zyxel Devices NAT. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 11.6 Address Mapping Address mapping can map local IP Addresses to global IP addresses. Ordering your rules is important because the Zyxel Device applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the Zyxel Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. Click Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping to display the following screen. Figure 100 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping PX7511-B0 Users Guide 175 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 62 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Rule Click this to create a new rule. Rule Name This is the name of the rule. Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types. Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type. Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and Many-to-

One mapping types. Type This is the address mapping type. One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for example, PAT, port address translation), the Zyxel Device's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Wan Interface Name This is the WAN interface to which the address mapping rule applies. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. 11.6.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule To add or edit an address mapping rule, click Add new rule or the rules edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next. Specify the NAT mapping type, the local and global IP address(es), and a WAN interface in this screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 176 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Figure 101 Address Mapping: Add/Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 63 Address Mapping: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Name Type up to 20 alphanumeric characters for the name of this rule. Type Choose the IP/port mapping type from one of the following. One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Zyxel Device's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Local Start IP Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local End IP Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types. Global Start IP Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type. Global End IP Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and Many-to-

One mapping types. WAN Interface Select a WAN interface to which the address mapping rule applies. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 11.7 NAT Sessions Use this screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions a client can use, to ensure that no single client uses up too many available NAT sessions. Some applications, such as P2P file sharing, demand a PX7511-B0 Users Guide 177 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) greater number of NAT sessions in order to get a better uploading and downloading rate. Click Network Setting > NAT > Sessions to display the following screen. Note: Enter a number of concurrent NAT sessions in the MAX NAT Session Per Host field, and click Apply to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions a client can use. Otherwise, clear the number in the MAX NAT Session Per Host field. Click Apply and there's no limit for concurrent NAT sessions a client can use. Figure 102 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 64 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions LABEL DESCRIPTION MAX NAT Session Per Host

(0 ~ 20480) Use this field to set a limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client host can have. If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to improve their performance. With heavy peer-to-peer application use, lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions. Cancel Apply Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to save your changes on this screen. 11.8 Technical Reference This part contains more information regarding NAT. 11.8.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Zyxel Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet PX7511-B0 Users Guide 178 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 65 NAT Definitions DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. Outside This refers to the host on the WAN. ITEM Inside Local Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 11.8.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address

(either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-to-

One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your Zyxel Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 11.8.3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The Zyxel Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 179 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Figure 103 How NAT Works 11.8.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP alias) behind the Zyxel Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. Figure 104 NAT Application With IP Alias PX7511-B0 Users Guide 180 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT. Table 66 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES ECHO FTP (File Transfer Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) DNS (Domain Name System) Finger HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) POP3 (Post Office Protocol) NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP trap PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) Port Forwarding Example PORT NUMBER 7 21 25 53 79 80 110 119 161 162 1723 Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 105 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example IP Address assigned by ISP PX7511-B0 Users Guide 181 C H A P T E R 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.1 DNS Overview DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The Zyxel Device uses a system DNS server

(in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry. After the Zyxel Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table. Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to use a dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, and so on). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. You first need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 12.2 on page 183). Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the Zyxel Device

(Section 12.3 on page 184). 12.1.2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 182 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. 12.2 DNS Entry DNS (Domain Name System) is used for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Zyxel Device. Click Network Setting >

DNS to open the DNS Entry screen. Note: The host name should consist of the hosts local name and the domain name. For example, Mycomputer.home is a host name where Mycomputer is the hosts local name, and .home is the domain name. Figure 106 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 67 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New DNS Entry Click this to create a new DNS entry.

This is the index number of the entry. HostName This indicates the host name or domain name. IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry You can manually add or edit the Zyxel Devices DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add New DNS Entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 183 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup Figure 107 DNS Entry: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 68 DNS Entry: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name Enter the host name of the DNS entry. IPv4 Address Enter the IP address of the DNS entry. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 12.3 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS can update your current dynamic IP address mapping to a hostname. Use this screen to configure a DDNS service provider on your Zyxel Device. Click Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 108 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS PX7511-B0 Users Guide 184 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 69 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Setup Dynamic DNS Select Enable to use dynamic DNS. Service Provider Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box. Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your Zyxel Device by your Dynamic DNS provider. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off line. Username Password Enable Wildcard Option Enable Off Line Option (Only applies to custom DNS) Dynamic DNS Status User Authentication Result This shows Success if the account is correctly set up with the Dynamic DNS provider account. Last Updated Time This shows the last time the IP address the Dynamic DNS provider has associated with the hostname was updated. Current Dynamic IP This shows the IP address your Dynamic DNS provider has currently associated with the hostname. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 185 C H A P T E R 13 IGMP/MLD 13.1 IGMP/MLD Overview Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network defined by multicast groups. Membership to these multicast groups are established using IGMP/MLD. Use the IGMP/MLD screen to configure IGMP/MLD group settings. 13.1.1 What You Need To Know Multicast and IGMP See Multicast on page 86 for more information. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4. MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join. An MLD Report message is equivalent to an IGMP Report message, and a MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. IGMP Fast Leave When a host leaves a multicast group (224.1.1.1), it sends an IGMP leave message to inform all routers

(224.0.0.2) in the multicast group. When a router receives the leave message, it sends a specific query message to all multicast group (224.1.1.1) members to check if any other hosts are still in the group. Then the router deletes the hosts information. With the IGMP fast leave feature enabled, the router removes the hosts information from the group member list once it receives a leave message from a host and the fast leave timer expires. 13.2 IGMP/MLD Settings Use this screen to configure multicast groups that the Zyxel Device manages through IGMP/MLD settings. To open this screen, click Network Setting > IGMP/MLD. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 186 Chapter 13 IGMP/MLD Figure 109 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 70 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP/MLD Configuration Default Version Enter the version of IGMP (1~3) and MLD (1~2) that you want the Zyxel Device to use on the WAN. Query Interval Enter the number of seconds the Zyxel Device sends a query message to hosts to get the group membership information. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 187 Chapter 13 IGMP/MLD Table 70 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Query Response Interval Enter the maximum number of seconds the Zyxel Device can wait for receiving a General Query message. Multicast routers use general queries to learn which multicast groups have members. Last Member Query Interval Enter the maximum number of seconds the Zyxel Device can wait for receiving a response to a Group-Specific Query message. Multicast routers use group-specific queries to learn whether any member remains in a specific multicast group. Robustness Value Maximum Multicast Groups Maximum Multicast Data Sources(for IGMPv3) Maximum Multicast Group Members Fast Leave Enable LAN to LAN

(Intra LAN) Multicast Enable Membership Join Immediate

(IPTV) Cancel Apply Enter the number of times (1~7) the Zyxel Device can resend a packet if packet loss occurs due to network congestion. Enter a number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface on the Zyxel Device is allowed to join. Once a multicast member is registered in the specified number of multicast groups, any new IGMP or MLD join report frames are dropped by the interface. Enter a number to limit the number of multicast data sources (1-24) a multicast group is allowed to have. Note: The setting only works for IGMPv3 and MLDv2. Enter a number to limit the number of multicast members a multicast group can have. Select this option to set the Zyxel Device to remove a port from the multicast tree immediately

(without sending an IGMP or MLD membership query message) once it receives an IGMP or MLD leave message. This is helpful if a user wants to quickly change a TV channel (multicast group change) especially for IPTV applications. Select this to enable LAN to LAN IGMP snooping capability. Select this to have the Zyxel Device add a host to a multicast group immediately once the Zyxel Device receives an IGMP or MLD join message. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 188 C H A P T E R 14 VLAN Group 14.1 Overview A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic. Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server. Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too. VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding, moving or changing ports without any re-cabling. A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. In the following example, VLAN IDs (VIDs) 100 and 200 are added to identify Video-on-Demand and IPTV traffic respectively coming from the VoD and IPTV multicast servers. The Zyxel Device can also tag outgoing requests to the servers with these VLAN IDs. Figure 110 VLAN Group Example 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use these screens to manage VLAN groups on the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 189 Chapter 14 VLAN Group 14.2 The VLAN Group Screen A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) divides a physical network into multiple logical networks. VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port(s) belongs. Ports can belong to one or more VLAN groups. This screen shows the VLAN groups created on the Zyxel Device. Click Network Setting > VLAN Group to open the following screen. Figure 111 Network Setting > VLAN Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 71 Network Setting > VLAN Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New VLAN Group Click this button to create a new VLAN group.

This is the index number of the VLAN group. Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the VLAN group. VLAN ID Interface Modify This shows the unique ID number that identifies the VLAN group. This shows the LAN ports included in the VLAN group and if traffic leaving the port will be tagged with the VLAN ID. Click the Edit icon to change an existing VLAN group setting or click the Delete icon to remove the VLAN group. 14.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group Click the Add New VLAN Group button in the VLAN Group screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to create a new VLAN group. Figure 112 Add/Edit VLAN Group PX7511-B0 Users Guide 190 Chapter 14 VLAN Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 72 Add/Edit VLAN Group LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Group Name Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. VLAN ID Enter a unique ID number, from 1 to 4,094, to identify this VLAN group. Outgoing traffic is tagged with this ID if TX Tagging is selected below. LAN Select Include to add the associated LAN interface to this VLAN group. Note: Select TX Tagging to tag outgoing traffic from the associated LAN port with the VLAN ID number entered above. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 191 C H A P T E R 15 Interface Grouping 15.1 Interface Grouping Overview By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the Zyxel Device are in the same group and can communicate with each other. Create interface groups to have the Zyxel Device assign IP addresses in different domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the Zyxel Device. Devices in different groups cannot communicate with each other directly. 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Interface Grouping screens let you create multiple networks on the Zyxel Device (Section 15.2 on page 192). 15.2 Interface Grouping Setup You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the Zyxel Device automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group. Use the LAN Setup screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the Zyxel Device assigns to the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the Zyxel Device to assign IP addresses based on the clients DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 8 on page 117 for more information. In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT 5.0

(meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 192 Chapter 15 Interface Grouping Figure 113 Interface Grouping Application You can use this screen to create new user-defined interface groups or modify existing ones. Interfaces that do not belong to any user-defined group always belong to the default group. Click Network Setting > Interface Grouping to open the following screen. Figure 114 Network Setting > Interface Grouping The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 73 Network Setting > Interface Grouping LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Interface Group Click this button to create a new interface group. Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group. WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group. LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group. Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the group. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 193 Chapter 15 Interface Grouping Table 73 Network Setting > Interface Grouping (continued) LABEL Modify DESCRIPTION Click the Edit icon to modify an existing Interface group setting or click the Delete icon to remove the Interface group. Add Click this button to create a new group. 15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Grouping screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group. If you want to automatically add LAN clients to a group, use filtering criteria. Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time. Note: After configuring a vendor ID, reboot the client device attached to the Zyxel Device to obtain an appropriate IP address. Note: You can have up to 15 filter criteria. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 194 Chapter 15 Interface Grouping Figure 115 Interface Group Configuration The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 74 Interface Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Name Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one ETH interface. WAN Interfaces used in the grouping Selected LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group. Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the Available LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Selected LAN Interfaces list to add the interfaces to this group. To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Selected LAN Interfaces, use the right-facing arrow. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 195 Chapter 15 Interface Grouping Table 74 Interface Group Configuration (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of the hardware or firmware. See Section 15.2.2 on page 196 for more information. Automatically Add Clients With the following DHCP Vendor IDs

This shows the index number of the rule. Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically. WildCard Support This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled. Modify Click the Edit icon to change the group setting. Click the Delete icon to delete this group from the Zyxel Device. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 15.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to automatically add clients to an interface group based on specified criteria. You can choose to define a group based on a MAC address, a vendor ID (DHCP option 60), an Identity Association Identifier (DHCP option 61), vendor specific information (DHCP option 125), or a VLAN group. Figure 116 Interface Grouping Criteria PX7511-B0 Users Guide 196 Chapter 15 Interface Grouping The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 75 Interface Grouping Criteria LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the source MAC address of the packet. Source MAC Address DHCP Option 60 Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. Enable wildcard Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for DHCP option 60. DHCP Option 61 Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic. Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN connection index number. DHCP Option 125 Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic. Enterprise Number Enter the vendors 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). Manufactur er OUI Specify the vendors OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes of the MAC address. Serial Number Product Class Enter the serial number of the device. Enter the product class of the device. VLAN Group Select this and the VLAN group of the matched traffic from the drop-down list box. A VLAN group can be configured in Network Setting > Vlan Group. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 197 C H A P T E R 16 Firewall 16.1 Firewall Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Zyxel Devices security settings. Use the firewall to protect your Zyxel Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 117 Default Firewall Action 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the Zyxel Device (Section 16.2 on page 199).

(Section 16.3 on page 201). on page 202). page 205). Use the Protocol screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section 16.4 Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (.Section 16.5 on PX7511-B0 Users Guide 198 Chapter 16 Firewall 16.1.2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-

ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users. Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The Zyxel Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system. In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself. DoS DDoS LAND Attack Ping of Death SPI Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot. Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN. 16.2 Firewall Settings Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the Zyxel Device. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. A higher firewall level means more restrictions on the Internet activities you can perform. Note: LAN to WAN is your access to all Internet services. WAN to LAN is the access of other computers on the Internet to devices behind the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 199 Chapter 16 Firewall Note: When the security level is set to High, Telnet, FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, DNS, IMAP, POP3, SMTP, and/or IPv6 ICMPv6 (Ping) traffic from the LAN are still allowed. Click Security > Firewall to display the General screen. Figure 118 Security > Firewall > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Security > Firewall > General LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 Firewall IPv6 Firewall Use the switch to turn on or off the firewall on the Zyxel Device for IPv4 traffic. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is disabled. Use the switch to turn on or off the firewall on the Zyxel Device for IPv6 traffic. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is disabled. Low Select Low to allow traffic from LAN to WAN or from WAN to LAN. Medium Select Medium to allow traffic from LAN to WAN but deny traffic from WAN to LAN. Select High to deny both directions of travel of packets (LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN) . High Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 200 Chapter 16 Firewall 16.3 Protocol Settings You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Protocol screen. Each set of protocol rules listed in the table are reusable objects to be used in conjunction with ACL rules in the Access Control screen. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. See Appendix C on page 322 for some examples. Note: Removing a protocol rule will also remove associated ACL rules. Click Security > Firewall > Protocol to display the following screen. Figure 119 Security > Firewall > Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Security > Firewall > Protocol LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Protocol Entry Click this to add a new service. Name This is the name of your customized service. Description This is the description of your customized service. Ports/Protocol Number This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or range of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number displays if the service uses another IP protocol. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the entry. Click the Delete icon to remove this entry. 16.3.1 Add New/Edit Protocol Entry Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewalls ACL rule configuration. Click Add New Protocol Entry or the Edit icon next to an existing service in the Protocol screen to display the following screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 201 Chapter 16 Firewall Figure 120 Protocol Entry: Add New/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 78 Security > Firewall > Protocol: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for your customized port. Description Enter a description for your customized port. Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, ICMPv6, or Other) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number. Protocol Protocol Number This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol. Enter the protocol number of your customized port. Source Port This field is displayed if you select either the TCP or UDP protocol. You may set it to Any, Single, or Range and enter the Port Number or range of Port Numbers for your source port. Destination Port This field is displayed if you select either the TCP or UDP protocol. You may set it to Any, Single, or Range and enter the Port Number or range of Port Numbers for your destination port. ICMPv6type This field is displayed if you select the ICMPv6 protocol. From the drop-down menu, select which type value you would like to use. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 16.4 Access Control Click Security > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. An Access Control List (ACL) rule is a manually-defined rule that can accept, reject, or drop incoming or outgoing packets from your network. This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 202 Chapter 16 Firewall Figure 121 Security > Firewall > Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Security > Firewall > Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New ACL Rule Click this to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic. This is the index number of the entry. This displays the name of the rule.

Name Src IP Dst IP Service Action This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any. This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any. This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender (REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT). Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Click the Move To icon to change the order of the rule. Enter the number in the # field. 16.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control screen. The following screen displays. Use this screen to accept, reject, or drop packets based on specified parameters, such as source and destination IP address, IP Type, service, and direction. You can also specify a limit as to how many packets this rule applies to at a certain period of time or specify a schedule for this rule. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 203 Chapter 16 Firewall Figure 122 Access Control: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 80 Access Control: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes. You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing the ACL rule. Order Select the order of the ACL rule. Select Source IP Address Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the source IP address in the field below. Source IP Address Enter the source IP address. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 204 Chapter 16 Firewall Table 80 Access Control: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Destination Device Destination IP Address Select Service Enter the destination IP address. IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6. Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below. Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security > Firewall > Protocol > Add screen display in this list. If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific Service. Protocol This field is displayed only when you select Specific Service in Select Service. Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ICMPv6) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. Custom Source Port This field is displayed only when you select Specific Service in Select Service and have either TCP or UDP in the Protocol field. Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source. Custom Destination Port This field is displayed only when you select Specific Service in Select Service and have either TCP or UDP in the Protocol field. Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination. TCP flag This field is displayed only when you select Specific Service in Select Service and have TCP in the Protocol field. Type Policy Select one of the following TCP flags: SYN (Synchronize), ACK (Acknowledge), URG (Urgent), PSH

(Push), RST (Reset), or FIN (Finished). This field is displayed only when you select Specific Service in Select Service and ICMPv6 in the protocol field. From the drop-down list box, select which ICMPv6 type you would like to use. Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of (ACCEPT) packets that match this rule. Direction Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. Enable Rate Limit Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the specified protocol. Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is. Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a new schedule rule by click Add New Rule. This will bring you to the Security > Scheduler Rules screen. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 16.5 DoS Settings DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable. Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks. Click Security > Firewall > DoS to display the following screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 205 Chapter 16 Firewall Figure 123 Security > Firewall > DoS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 81 Security > Firewall > DoS LABEL DESCRIPTION DoS Protection Blocking Cancel Apply Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 206 C H A P T E R 17 MAC Filter 17.1 MAC Filter Overview You can configure the Zyxel Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filter screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the LAN client to configure this screen. 17.2 MAC Filter Settings Enable MAC Address Filter and add the host name and MAC address of a LAN client to the table if you wish to allow or deny them access to your network. Click Security > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 124 Security > MAC Filter You can choose to enable or disable the filters per entry; make sure that the check box under Active is selected if you want to use a filter, as shown in the example below. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 207 Chapter 17 MAC Filter Figure 125 Enabling individual MAC Filters The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 82 Security > MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function. MAC Restrict Mode Select Allow to only permit the listed MAC addresses access to the Zyxel Device. Select Deny to permit anyone access to the Zyxel Device except the listed MAC addresses. Add New Rule Click this button to create a new entry. This is the index number of the MAC address. Set Active Host Name MAC Address Select Active to enable the MAC filter rule. The rule will not be applied if Allow is not selected. Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Zyxel Device. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Zyxel Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Delete Cancel Apply Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 208 C H A P T E R 18 Parental Control 18.1 Parental Control Overview Parental control allows you to limit the time a user can access the Internet and prevent users from viewing inappropriate content or participating in specified online activities. 18.2 Parental Control Settings Use this screen to enable parental control and view parental control rules and schedules. You can limit the time a user can access the Internet and prevent users from viewing inappropriate content or participating in specified online activities. These rules are defined in a Parental Control Profile (PCP). Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen. Figure 126 Security > Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 83 Security > Parental Control LABEL General DESCRIPTION Parental Control Select Enable to activate parental control on the Zyxel Device. Parental Control Profile (PCP) Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new Parental Control Profile (PCP).

Status This shows the index number of the rule. This indicates whether the rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. PCP Name This shows the name of the rule. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 209 Chapter 18 Parental Control Table 83 Security > Parental Control (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Home Network User MAC Internet Access Schedule This shows the MAC address of the LAN users computer to which this rule applies. This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled. Network Service This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown. Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Cancel Apply Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 210 Chapter 18 Parental Control Figure 127 Security > Parental Control > Add/Edit PCP PX7511-B0 Users Guide 211 Chapter 18 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 84 Security > Parental Control >Add/Edit PCP DESCRIPTION LABEL General Active Rule List Day Time Internet Access Schedule Add New Service Network Service Select Enable or Disable to activate or deactivate the parental control rule. Parental Control Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the rule. Home Network User Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you select Custom, enter the LAN users MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all LAN users. In Home Network User, select Custom, enter the LAN users MAC address, then click the Add icon to enter a computer MAC address for this PCP. Up to five are allowed. Click the Delete icon to remove one. Select check boxes for the days that you want the Zyxel Device to perform parental control. Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access (Authorized access) or denied access (No access). Click this to add a new time bar. Up to three are allowed. Network Service Setting If you select Block, the Zyxel Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below. If you select Allow, the Zyxel Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below. Add New Service Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the Service Name, Protocol, and Port of the new rule, as shown in Figure 129.

This shows the index number of the rule. Service Name This shows the name of the rule. Protocol:Port This shows the protocol and the port of the rule. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Site/URL Keyword Block or Allow the Web Site If you select Block the Web URLs, the Zyxel Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below. Add

Website Modify If you select Allow the Web URLs, the Zyxel Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below. Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Zyxel Device blocks or allows access. This shows the index number of the rule. This shows the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Zyxel Device blocks or allows access. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 212 Chapter 18 Parental Control Table 84 Security > Parental Control >Add/Edit PCP (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Redirect blocked site to Zyxel Family Safety page Select this to redirect users who access any blocked websites listed above to the Zyxel Family Safety page as shown next. Figure 128 Zyxel Family Safety Page Example Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. Add New Service Use this screen to add a new service rule. Figure 129 Security > Parental Control > Add/Edit PCP > Add New Service The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 85 Security > Parental Control > Add/Edit PCP > Add New Service DESCRIPTION LABEL Add New Service Select the name of the service from the drop-down list. Otherwise, select User Define and specify the name, protocol, and port of the service. If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service Name field, this field will not be configurable. Protocol Select the transport layer protocol used for the service. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP & UDP. Port Enter the port of the service. If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service Name field, this field will not be configurable. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 213 Chapter 18 Parental Control Table 85 Security > Parental Control > Add/Edit PCP > Add New Service (continued) LABEL Cancel OK DESCRIPTION Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. Add Site/URL Keyword Click Add in the Site/URL Keyword section of the Edit/Add new PCP screen to open the following screen. Note: Do not include HTTP or HTTPS in the keyword. HTTPS connections cannot be blocked by Parental Control. Figure 130 Security > Parental Control > Add/Edit PCP > Add Keyword The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 86 Security > Parental Control > Add/Edit PCP > Add Keyword DESCRIPTION LABEL Site/URL Keyword Cancel OK Enter a keyword and click OK to have the Zyxel Device block access to the website URLs that contain the keyword. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 214 C H A P T E R 19 Scheduler Rule 19.1 Scheduler Rule Overview A Scheduler Rule allows you to define time periods and days during which the Zyxel Device allows certain actions. 19.2 Scheduler Rule Settings Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules. A scheduler rule is a reusable object that is applied to other features, such as Firewall Access Control. Click Security > Scheduler Rule to open the following screen. Figure 131 Security > Scheduler Rule The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 87 Security > Scheduler Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Rule Click this to create a new rule. This is the index number of the entry. Rule Name This shows the name of the rule.

Day Time This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled. This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled. Description This shows the description of this rule. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule. Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule. Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature. 19.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule Rule Click the Add New Rule button in the Scheduler Rule screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a schedule rule. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 215 Chapter 19 Scheduler Rule Figure 132 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 88 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Name Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this schedule. Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the Zyxel Device to perform this scheduler rule. Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which the rule will be enforced. Time of Day Range Cancel OK Description Enter a description for this scheduler rule. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 216 C H A P T E R 20 Certificates 20.1 Certificates Overview The Zyxel Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the Zyxel Device's CA-signed certificates (Section 20.4 on page 221). The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Zyxel Device (Section 20.4 on page 221). 20.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Certification Authority A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the Zyxel Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority. 20.3 Local Certificates Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. Use this screen to view the Zyxel Devices summary list of certificates, generate certification requests, and import the signed certificates. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 217 Chapter 20 Certificates Figure 133 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 89 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION Private Key is protected by a password Browse / Choose File Select the check box and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the Zyxel Device. The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces). Click Browse or Choose File to find the certificate file you want to upload. Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the Zyxel Device. Create Certificate Request Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the Zyxel Device generate a certification request. Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Modify This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C

(Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate

(or certification request). For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate. Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 20.3.1 Create Certificate Request Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the following screen. Use this screen to have the Zyxel Device generate a certification request. To create a certificate signing request, you need to enter a common name, organization name, state/province name, and the two-letter country code for the certificate. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 218 Chapter 20 Certificates Figure 134 Create Certificate Request The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 90 Create Certificate Request LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name enter it manually. Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate. Common Name Select Auto to have the Zyxel Device configure this field automatically. Or select Customize to Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or email address in the field provided. The domain name or email address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The domain name or email address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. Organization Name Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Zyxel Device drops trailing spaces. State/Province Name Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Zyxel Device drops trailing spaces. Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. Country/Region Name Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 20.3.2 View Certificate Request Click the View icon in the Local Certificates screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certificate request. The Certificate is used to verify the authenticity of the certification authority. The Private Key serves as your digital signature for authentication and must be safely stored. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 219 Chapter 20 Certificates Figure 135 Certificate Request: View The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 91 Certificate Request: View DESCRIPTION LABEL Name Type Subject This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name

(CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). PX7511-B0 Users Guide 220 Chapter 20 Certificates Table 91 Certificate Request: View (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an email to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution. Private Key This field displays the private key of this certificate. Signing Request This field displays the CSR (Certificate Signing Request) information of this certificate. The CSR will be provided to a certificate authority, and it includes information about the public key, organization name, domain name, location, and country of this certificate. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. 20.4 Trusted CA Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Zyxel Device to accept as trusted. The Zyxel Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Note: You can have a maximum of 4 trusted certificates. Figure 136 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 92 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA LABEL DESCRIPTION Import Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the Zyxel Device.

Name Subject This is the index number of the entry. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name

(CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 221 Chapter 20 Certificates Table 92 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA (continued) DESCRIPTION LABEL Type Modify This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 20.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view in-

depth information about the certification authoritys certificate. The certificate text box is read-only and can be distributed to others. Figure 137 Trusted CA: View PX7511-B0 Users Guide 222 Chapter 20 Certificates The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 93 Trusted CA: View DESCRIPTION LABEL Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an email to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. 20.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The Zyxel Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates. Certificates should be in one of the following formats: Binary X.509, PEM (base-64) encoded, Binary PKCS#7, or PEM

(base-64) encoded PKCS#7. Figure 138 Trusted CA: Import Certificate The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 94 Trusted CA: Import Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Browse or Choose File and select the certificate you want to upload. Certificate File Path Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 223 C H A P T E R 21 VoIP 21.1 Overview You can make calls over the Internet using VoIP technology. For this, you first need to set up a SIP account with a SIP service provider. Use this chapter to:

Connect an analog phone to the Zyxel Device. Configure settings such as speed dial. Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls. 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter These screens allow you to configure your Zyxel Device to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line, and to set up the phones you connect to the Zyxel Device. Use the SIP Account screen (Section 21.3 on page 226) to set up information about your SIP account, control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the Zyxel Device use and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the Zyxel Device. Use the SIP Service Provider screen (Section 21.4 on page 230) to configure the SIP server information, QoS for VoIP calls, the numbers for certain phone functions, and dialing plan. Use the Phone Device screen (Section 21.5 on page 235) to control which SIP account(s) each phone uses to handle outgoing and incoming calls. Use the Region screen (Section 21.6 on page 238) to change settings that depend on the country you are in.

(VoIP) phone numbers. Use the Call Rule screen (Section 21.7 on page 238) to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently-used Use the Call History screen (Section 21.8 on page 239) to view detailed information for each outgoing call you made or each incoming call from someone calling you. You can also view the summary list of received, dialed and missed calls. You dont necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account. In fact, if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen, it is usually best to leave it at its default setting. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 224 Chapter 21 VoIP 21.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP. IP is the Internet Protocol, which is the message-carrying standard the Internet runs on. So, Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals (speech) over the Internet (or another network that uses the Internet Protocol). SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol. SIP is a signaling standard that lets one network device (like a computer or the Zyxel Device) send messages to another. In VoIP, these messages are about phone calls over the network. For example, when you dial a number on your Zyxel Device, it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device (the number you dialed) to take part in the call. VoIP SIP SIP Accounts A SIP account is a type of VoIP account. It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet. When you set the Zyxel Device to use your SIP account to make calls, the Zyxel Device is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet. Strictly speaking, you dont need a SIP account. It is possible for one SIP device (like the Zyxel Device) to call another without involving a SIP service provider. However, the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances. Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup - figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another. SIP Address A SIP address is a URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) that resembles an email address, using the format:

user@domain. It uniquely identifies a telephone extension over a VoIP system. A SIP address of 123-45-

67@voip-provider.net tells a client to connect to voip-provider.net and request a connection to 123-45-

67. While VoIP can only send voice messages over the Internet, SIP (though strictly speaking is a type of VoIP) can send voice, data, video, and other media. VoIP phones also need to be connected to a computer to function, whereas SIP phones only need to be connected to a modem. How to Find Out More See Section 21.9 on page 240 for advanced technical information on SIP. 21.2 Before You Begin Before you can use these screens, you need to have a VoIP account already set up. If you dont have one yet, you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet. You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready, before you start to configure the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 225 Chapter 21 VoIP 21.3 The SIP Account Screen The Zyxel Device uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming calls destination number matches your SIP accounts VoIP number. In order to make or receive a VoIP call, you need to enable and configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port. The SIP account contains information that allows your Zyxel Device to connect to your VoIP service provider. See Section 21.3.1 on page 226 for how to map a SIP account to a phone port. Use this screen to view SIP account information. You can also enable and disable each SIP account. To access this screen, click VoIP > SIP > SIP Account. Figure 139 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account Each field is described in the following table. Table 95 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new account Click this to configure a SIP account.

Enable This is the index number of the entry. This shows whether the SIP account is activated or not. SIP Account This shows the name of the SIP account. Service Provider This shows the name of the SIP service provider. Account Number. This shows the SIP address. Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account. Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP account from the Zyxel Device. 21.3.1 The SIP Account Add/Edit Screen Use this screen to configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port in the Phone Device screen. To access this screen, click the Add New Account button or click the Edit icon of an entry in the VoIP > SIP >

SIP Account screen. Note: You dont necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 226 Chapter 21 VoIP Figure 140 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add new account/Edit PX7511-B0 Users Guide 227 Chapter 21 VoIP Each field is described in the following table. Table 96 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add new account/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account Selection SIP Account Selection This field displays ChangeMe if you are creating a new SIP account or the SIP account you are modifying. SIP Service Provider Association SIP Account Associated with Select the SIP service provider profile to use for the SIP account you are configuring in this screen. You should already have configured a SIP service provider profile in the SIP Service Provider screen. This field is read-only when you are modifying an existing SIP account. General Enable SIP Account SIP Account Number Authentication Username Password URL Type URL Type Voice Features Primary Compression Type Secondary Compression Type Third Compression Type Select this if you want the Zyxel Device to use this account. Clear it if you do not want the Zyxel Device to use this account. Enter your SIP address. In the full SIP URI, this is the part before the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters. Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters. Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the Zyxel Device sends the SIP address. SIP - include the SIP service domain name. TEL - do not include the SIP service domain name. Select the type of voice coder/decoder (codec) that you want the Zyxel Device to use. G.711 provides high voice quality but requires more bandwidth (64 kbps). G.711 is the default codec used by phone companies and digital handsets. G.711a is typically used in Europe. G.711u is typically used in North America and Japan. G.726-24 operates at 24 kbps. G.726-32 operates at 32 kbps. By contrast, G.729 only requires 8 kbps. G.722 is a 7 KHz wideband voice codec that operates at 48, 56 and 64 kbps. By using a sample rate of 16 kHz, G.722 can provide higher fidelity and better audio quality than narrowband codecs like G.711, in which the voice signal is sampled at 8 KHz. The Zyxel Device must use the same codec as the peer. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on a codec. Select the Zyxel Devices first choice for voice coder/decoder. Select the Zyxel Devices second choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only want the Zyxel Device to accept the first choice. Select the Zyxel Devices third choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only want the Zyxel Device to accept the first or second choice. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 228 Enable G.168

(Echo Cancellation) Enable VAD

(Voice Active Detector) Call Features Send Caller ID Enable Call Transfer Enable Call Waiting Call Waiting Reject Timer Enable Unconditional Forward Chapter 21 VoIP Table 96 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add new account/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Speaking Volume Control Select the loudness that the Zyxel Device uses for speech that it sends to the peer device. Listening Volume Control Select the loudness that the Zyxel Device uses for speech that it receives from the peer device. Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. Select this if the Zyxel Device should stop transmitting when you are not speaking. This reduces the bandwidth the Zyxel Device uses. Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone calls. Clear this if you do not want to send identification. Select this to enable call transfer on the Zyxel Device. This allows you to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. Select this to enable call waiting on the Zyxel Device. This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone number. Specify the time in seconds that the Zyxel Device waits before rejecting the second call if you do not answer it. Select this if you want the Zyxel Device to forward all incoming calls to the specified phone number. Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right. Enable Busy Forward Select this if you want the Zyxel Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the phone port is busy. Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right. If you have call waiting, the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call. Enable No Answer Forward Select this if you want the Zyxel Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the call is unanswered. (See No Answer Time.) Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right. No Answer Time This field is used by the Active No Answer Forward feature. Enable Do Not Disturb Active Incoming Anonymous Call Block Enable MWI MWI Subscribe Expiration Time Hot Line/ Warm Line Number Hot Line Enter the number of seconds the Zyxel Device should wait for you to answer an incoming call before it considers the call unanswered. Select this to set your phone to not ring when someone calls you. Select this if you do not want the phone to ring when someone tries to call you with caller ID deactivated. Select this if you want to hear a waiting (beeping) dial tone on your phone when you have at least one voice message. Your VoIP service provider must support this feature. Keep the default value of this field unless your VoIP service provider tells you to change it. Enter the number of seconds the SIP server should provide the message waiting service each time the Zyxel Device subscribes to the service. Before this time passes, the Zyxel Device automatically subscribes again. Select this to enable the hot line or warm line feature on the Zyxel Device. Select this to have the Zyxel Device dial the specified hot line number immediately when you pick up the telephone. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 229 Chapter 21 VoIP Hot Line / Warm Line Number Warm Line Timer Table 96 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add new account/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Warm Line Select this to have the Zyxel Device dial the specified warm line number after you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad for a period of time. Enter the number of the hot line or warm line that you want the Zyxel Device to dial. Enter a number of seconds that the Zyxel Device waits before dialing the warm line number if you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad. Enable Missed Call Email Notification Select this option to have the Zyxel Device email you a notification when there is a missed call. Mail Account Select a mail account for the email address specified below. If you select None here, email notifications will not be sent via email. You must have configured a mail account already in the Email Notification screen. Send Notification to Email Notifications are sent to the email address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, notifications will not be sent via email. Missed Call Email Title Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the email notifications that the Zyxel Device sends. Early Media Select this if you want people to hear a customized recording when they call you. IVR Play Index Select the tone you want people to hear when they call you. This field is configurable only when you select Early Media. See Section 21.9 on page 240 for information on how to record these tones. Select this to play a customized recording when you put people on hold. Music On Hold

(MOH) IVR Play Index Select the tone to play when you put someone on hold. This field is configurable only when you select Music on Hold, See Section 21.9 on page 240 for information on how to record these tones. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 21.4 The SIP Service Provider Screen Use this screen to view the SIP service provider information on the Zyxel Device. A SIP provider offers Internet call services using VoIP technology. You may need to consult your SIP service provider for the following settings. Click VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider to open the following screen. Figure 141 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider PX7511-B0 Users Guide 230 Chapter 21 VoIP Each field is described in the following table. Table 97 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Provider Click this button to add a new SIP service provider.

This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the SIP service provider. SIP Service Provider Name SIP Proxy Server Address REGISTER Server Address SIP Service Domain Modify This shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP server. This shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server. This shows the SIP service domain name. Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP service provider. Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP service provider from the Zyxel Device. 21.4.1 The SIP Service Provider Add/Edit Screen Use this screen to configure a SIP service provider on the Zyxel Device. Click the Add New Provider button or an Edit icon in the VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider to open the following screen. Note: Click this (

) to see all the fields in the screen. You dont necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account. Click again to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 231 Chapter 21 VoIP Figure 142 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add new provider/Edit PX7511-B0 Users Guide 232 Chapter 21 VoIP Each field is described in the following table. Table 98 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add new provider/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection This field displays ADD_NEW if you are creating a new SIP service provider profile or the SIP service provider name you are modifying. General SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provider Name SIP Local Port Select Enable SIP Service Provider to enable the SIP service provider. Enter the name of your SIP service provider. Enter the Zyxel Devices listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. SIP Proxy Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service provider. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy, redirect or register server. SIP Proxy Server Port Enter the SIP servers listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. SIP REGISTRAR Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. SIP REGISTRAR Server Port Enter the SIP register servers listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field. Enter the SIP service domain name. In the full SIP URI, this is the part after the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters. SIP Service Domain RFC Support PRACK (RFC 3262, Require:

100rel) PRACK (RFC 3262) defines a mechanism to provide reliable transmission of SIP provisional response messages, which convey information on the processing progress of the request. This uses the option tag 100rel and the Provisional Response ACKnowledgement (PRACK) method. Select this to have the peer device require the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably. VoIP IOP Flags Select the VoIP inter-operability settings you want to activate. Replace a dial digit # with %23 in the INVITE messages. Remove the Route header in SIP packets. Bound Interface Name If you select Any_WAN, the Zyxel Device automatically activates the VoIP service when any LAN or WAN connection is up. If you select Multi_WAN, you also need to select two or more pre-configured WAN interfaces. The VoIP service is activated only when one of the selected WAN connections is up. Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server if your VoIP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls. This allows the Zyxel Device to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG. Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the Zyxel Device to keep it from re-translating the IP address (since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server). Outbound Proxy Port Enter the SIP outbound proxy servers listening port, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 233 Replace dial digit # to %23 in SIP messages Remove the Route header in SIP messages Bound Interface Name Outbound Proxy Outbound Proxy Address Chapter 21 VoIP Table 98 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add new provider/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this to enable the SIP server via DHCP option 120. Use DHCP Option 120 First RTP Port Range Start Port End Port SRTP Support SRTP Support DTMF Mode DTMF Mode Transport Type G711 Fax Passthrough T38 Fax Relay QoS Tag Enter the listening port number(s) for RTP traffic, if your VoIP service provider gave you this information. Otherwise, keep the default values. To enter one port number, enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields. To enter a range of ports, enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field. enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field. When you make a VoIP call using SIP, the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used to handle voice data transfer. The Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP) is a security profile of RTP. It is designed to provide encryption and authentication for the RTP data in both unicast and multicast applications. The Zyxel Device supports encryption using AES with a 128-bit key. To protect data integrity, SRTP uses a Hash-based Message Authentication Code (HMAC) calculation with Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA)-1 to authenticate data. HMAC SHA-1 produces a 80 or 32-bit authentication tag that is appended to the packet. Both the caller and callee should use the same algorithms to establish an SRTP session. Select AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 or AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 to enable both data encryption and authentication for voice data. Select AES_CM_128_NULL to use 128-bit data encryption but disable data authentication. Select NULL_CIPHER_HMAC_SHA1_80 to disable encryption but require authentication using the default 80-bit tag. Control how the Zyxel Device handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons. You should use the same mode your VoIP service provider uses. RFC2833 - send the DTMF tones in RTP packets. PCM - send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream. This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression (like G.711). Codecs that use compression (like G.729 and G.726) can distort the tones. SIP INFO - send the DTMF tones in SIP messages. Crypto Suite Select the encryption and authentication algorithm set used by the Zyxel Device to set up an SRTP media session with the peer device. Transport Type Select the transport layer protocol UDP or TCP (usually UDP) used for SIP. Ignore Direct IP Select Enable to have the connected CPE devices accept SIP requests only from the SIP proxy/

register server specified above. SIP requests sent from other IP addresses will be ignored. FAX Option This field controls how the Zyxel Device handles fax messages. Select this if the Zyxel Device should use G.711 to send fax messages. The peer devices must use the same settings. Select this if the Zyxel Device should send fax messages as UDP or TCP/IP packets through IP networks. This provides better quality, but it may have inter-operability problems. The peer devices must also use T.38. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 234 Chapter 21 VoIP Table 98 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add new provider/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP DSCP Mark Setting Enter the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number for SIP message transmissions. The Zyxel Device creates Class of Service (CoS) priority tags with this number to SIP traffic that it transmits. RTP DSCP Mark Setting Enter the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number for RTP voice transmissions. The Zyxel Device creates Class of Service (CoS) priority tags with this number to RTP traffic that it transmits. Timer Setting SIP Register Expiration Duration Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the SIP register server before it is deleted. The Zyxel Device automatically tries to re-register your SIP account when one-half of this time has passed. (The SIP register server might have a different expiration.) SIP Register Fail Re-try timer Enter the number of seconds the Zyxel Device waits before it tries again to register the SIP account, if the first try failed or if there is no response. Session Expires

(SE) Enter the number of seconds the Zyxel Device lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. Min-SE Enter the minimum number of seconds the Zyxel Device lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions. This field is the shortest expiration time that the Zyxel Device accepts. Dialing Interval Selection DNS SRV Dialing Interval Selection Enter the number of seconds the Zyxel Device should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it makes the phone call. The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers. Enable DNS SRV Select this to have the Zyxel Device use DNS procedures to resolve the SIP domain and find the SIP servers IP address, port number and supported transport protocol(s). The Zyxel Device first uses DNS Name Authority Pointer (NAPTR) records to determine the transport protocols supported by the SIP server. It then performs DNS Service (SRV) query to determine the port number for the protocol. The Zyxel Device resolves the SIP servers IP address by a standard DNS address record lookup. The SIP Server Port and REGISTER Server Port fields in the General section above are grayed out and not applicable and the Transport Type can also be set to AUTO if you enable this option. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. 21.5 The Phone Device Screen Use this screen to view detailed information on phones used for Internet phone calls (SIP). You can define which phone(s) will ring when a specific SIP address receives an incoming call, and which SIP address will be used when an outgoing call is made with a specific phone. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Phone Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 235 Chapter 21 VoIP Figure 143 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device Each field is described in the following table. Table 99 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device DESCRIPTION LABEL

This displays the index number of the phone device. Phone ID This field displays the name of a phone port on the Zyxel Device. Internal Number This field displays the internal call prefix of a phone port on the Zyxel Device. This field displays the SIP address that you use to receive calls on this phone port. This field displays the SIP address that you use to make calls on this phone port. Incoming SIP Number Outgoing SIP Number Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account. 21.5.1 The Phone Device Edit Screen Use this screen to control which SIP account(s) each phone uses. Click an Edit icon in VoIP > Phone >

Phone Device to open the following screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 236 Chapter 21 VoIP Figure 144 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device > Edit Each field is described in the following table. Table 100 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device > Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call SIP Account(s) to Receive Incoming Call Select the SIP account you want to use when making outgoing calls with the analog phone connected to this phone port. Select a SIP account if you want to receive phone calls for the selected SIP account on this phone port. If you select more than one SIP account for incoming calls, there is no way to distinguish between them when you receive phone calls. If you do not select a source for incoming calls, you cannot receive any calls on this phone port. Immediate Dial Enable Select this if you want to use the pound key (#) to tell the Zyxel Device to make the phone call immediately, instead of waiting for the number of second you selected in the Dialing Interval Selection field of the VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add New Provider/Edit screen. If you select this, dial the phone number, and then press the pound key. The Zyxel Device makes the call immediately instead of waiting. You can still wait, if you want. Cancel OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving Click OK to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 237 Chapter 21 VoIP 21.6 The Phone Region Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the Zyxel Device is in. Selecting the region where the device is physically located improves the quality of phone calls. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Region. Note: You need to reboot the device after changing the region settings for it to take effect. Figure 145 VoIP > Phone > Region Each field is described in the following table. Table 101 VoIP > Phone > Region LABEL DESCRIPTION Region Setting Select the place in which the Zyxel Device is located. Call Service Mode Select the mode for supplementary phone services (call hold, call waiting, call transfer and three-way conference calls) that your VoIP service provider supports. Europe Type - use supplementary phone services in European mode USA Type - use supplementary phone services American mode You might have to subscribe to these services to use them. Contact your VoIP service provider. Cancel Apply Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the Zyxel Device. 21.7 The Call Rule Screen Use this screen to add, edit, or remove speed-dial numbers for outgoing calls. Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers. You also have to create speed-dial entries if you want to call SIP addresses that contain letters. Once you have configured a speed dial rule, you can use a shortcut (the speed dial number, #01 for example) on your phone's keypad to call the phone number. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 238 Chapter 21 VoIP Figure 146 VoIP > Call Rule Each field is described in the following table. Table 102 VoIP > Call Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Clear All Speed Dials Keys Number Description Cancel Apply Click this to erase all the speed-dial entries on this screen. This field displays the speed-dial number you should dial to use this entry. Enter the SIP address you want the Zyxel Device to call when you dial the speed-dial number. Enter a name to identify the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters. Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value. Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the Zyxel Device. 21.8 The Call History Screen The Zyxel Device logs calls from or to your SIP addresses. This screen allows you to view the summary of received, dialed and missed calls and a call history list. You can also see detailed information for each outgoing call you made or each incoming call from someone calling you. The Zyxel Device stores up to 300 incoming call logs and 300 outgoing call logs. If the number of entries exceed the maximum value, the earliest log of that type will be deleted. Click VoIP > Call History. The following screen displays. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 239 Chapter 21 VoIP Figure 147 VoIP > Call History Each field is described in the following table. Table 103 VoIP > Call History DESCRIPTION Click this button to remove all entries from the call history list. Click this button to renew the call history list. This is the date when the calls were made. Total Calls This displays the total number of calls from or to your SIP addresses that day. Outgoing Calls This displays how many calls originated from you that day. Incoming Calls This displays how many calls you received that day. Missing Calls This displays how many incoming calls were not answered that day. This displays how long all calls lasted that day. Select the type of the calls. The call types are: All, Incoming, Outgoing and Missed. This displays the type of the calls. Date/Time This displays the date and time when the calls were made. Peer Number This displays the SIP address that called you or you called. Phone Number This displays the SIP address you used to make outgoing calls or receive calls. LABEL Clear Refresh Date Total Duration

(hh:mm:ss) Classify Type Duration

(hh:mm:ss) Delete This displays how long the call lasted. Click the Delete icon to remove the call history. 21.9 Technical Reference This section contains background material relevant to the VoIP screens. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 240 Chapter 21 VoIP VoIP SIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol. This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit-switched telephone network. You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail. Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP) companies provide VoIP service. Circuit-switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second (Kbps) in each direction to handle a telephone call. VoIP can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth. The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions. The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling. SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit-switched telephone networks. SIP Identities SIP Number SIP Service Domain SIP Registration A SIP account uses an identity (sometimes referred to as a SIP address). A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier). A SIP account's URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the way an email address identifies an email account. The format of a SIP identity is SIP-Number@SIP-

Service-Domain. The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the @ symbol. A SIP number can use letters like in an email address (johndoe@your-ITSP.com for example) or numbers like a telephone number

(1122334455@VoIP-provider.com for example). The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI. For example, if the SIP address is 1122334455@VoIP-provider.com, then VoIP-provider.com is the SIP service domain. Each Zyxel Device is an individual SIP User Agent (UA). To provide voice service, it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers. A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents, as well as its current IP address (for the routing of incoming SIP requests). After successful registration, the SIP server knows that the users (identified by their dedicated SIP URIs) are represented by the UA, and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent. Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client (UAC) running in the VoIP gateway (the Zyxel Device). The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER message, as well as the relevant user and authorization data. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 241 Chapter 21 VoIP A SIP registration has a limited lifespan. The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan. If it does not do so, the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar's database and the connection broken. The Zyxel Device attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on. When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled, the Zyxel Device attempts to register the port immediately. Authorization Requirements SIP registrations (and subsequent SIP requests) require a username and password for authorization. These credentials are validated via a challenge / response system using the HTTP digest mechanism (as detailed in RFC 3261, "SIP: Session Initiation Protocol"). SIP is a client-server protocol. A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests. A SIP server responds to the SIP requests. When you use SIP to make a VoIP call, it originates at a client and terminates at a server. A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone. One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server. SIP Servers SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls. This means that SIP can be used for peer-

to-peer communications even though it is a client-server protocol. In the following figure, either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call. A and B can also both act as a SIP SIP user agent to receive the call. Figure 148 SIP User Agent SIP Proxy Server A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server. In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C. The client device (A in the figure) sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server (B). 1 2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 242 Chapter 21 VoIP Figure 149 SIP Proxy Server SIP Redirect Server A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests, translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request. Then the client device that originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server. Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests. In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C. 1 Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server (B). 2 The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with Cs IP address (or domain name). 3 Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 243 Chapter 21 VoIP Figure 150 SIP Redirect Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity-to-IP address (or domain name) mapping. The register server checks your user name and password when you register. When you make a VoIP call using SIP, the RTP (Real time Transport Protocol) is used to handle voice data transfer. See RFC 1889 for details on RTP. Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits. SIP Register Server RTP Pulse Code Modulation SIP Call Progression Table 104 SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call. A calls B. A 1. INVITE 4. ACK 6. BYE B 2. Ringing 3. OK 5.Dialogue (voice traffic) PX7511-B0 Users Guide 7. OK 244 Chapter 21 VoIP 1 A sends a SIP INVITE request to B. This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call. 2 3 B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing. B sends an OK response after the call is answered. 4 A then sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call. 5 Now A and B exchange voice media (talk). 6 After talking, A hangs up and sends a BYE request. 7 B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated. SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers Usually, the SIP UAC sets up a phone call by sending a request to the SIP proxy server. Then, the proxy server looks up the destination to which the call should be forwarded (according to the URI requested by the SIP UAC). The request may be forwarded to more than one proxy server before arriving at its destination. The response to the request goes to all the proxy servers through which the request passed, in reverse sequence. Once the session is set up, session traffic is sent between the UAs directly, bypassing all the proxy servers in between. The following figure shows the SIP and session traffic flow between the user agents (UA 1 and UA 2) and the proxy servers (this example shows two proxy servers, PROXY 1 and PROXY 2). Figure 151 SIP Call Through Proxy Servers DSL DSL PX7511-B0 Users Guide 245 Chapter 21 VoIP The following table shows the SIP call progression. Table 105 SIP Call Progression UA 1 Invite PROXY 1 PROXY 2 UA 2 Invite 100 Trying 180 Ringing 200 OK Invite 100 Trying 180 Ringing 200 OK 180 Ringing 200 OK RTP BYE ACK RTP 200 OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 User Agent 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 1. This message is an invitation to User Agent 2 to participate in a SIP telephone call. Proxy 1 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request. Proxy 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 2. Proxy 2 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request. Proxy 2 sends a SIP INVITE request to User Agent 2. User Agent 2 sends a response back to Proxy 2 indicating that the phone is ringing. The response is relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1. User Agent 2 sends an OK response to Proxy 2 after the call is answered. This is also relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1. User Agent 1 and User Agent 2 exchange RTP packets containing voice data directly, without involving the proxies. 7 When User Agent 2 hangs up, he sends a BYE request. User Agent 1 replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request, and the call is terminated. Voice Coding A codec (coder/decoder) codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals. The Zyxel Device supports the following codecs. G.711 is a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) waveform codec. PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples. G.711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 246 Chapter 21 VoIP G.726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM (ADPCM) waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion. ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples. The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction, the less space needed to describe it. G.726 operates at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps. G.729 is an Analysis-by-Synthesis (AbS) hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds. G.729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps. Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection (VAD) detects whether or not speech is present. This lets the Zyxel Device reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking. Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD, the Zyxel Device generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking. The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection. Echo Cancellation G.168 is an ITU-T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk. MWI (Message Waiting Indication) Enable Message Waiting Indication (MWI) enables your phone to give you a messagewaiting

(beeping) dial tone when you have a voice message(s). Your VoIP service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842. Custom Tones (IVR) IVR (Interactive Voice Response) is a feature that allows you to use your telephone to interact with the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device allows you to record custom tones for the Early Media and Music On Hold functions. The same recordings apply to both the caller ringing and on hold tones. Total Time for All Tones 900 seconds for all custom tones combined Table 106 Custom Tones Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Maximum Time per Individual Tone 180 seconds Total Number of Tones Recordable 5 You can record up to 5 different custom tones but the total time must be 900 seconds or less. Recording Custom Tones Use the following steps if you would like to create new tones or change your tones:

PX7511-B0 Users Guide 247 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 Chapter 21 VoIP Pick up the phone and press **** on your phones keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu. Press a number from 1101~1105 on your phone followed by the # key. Play your desired music or voice recording into the receivers mouthpiece. Press the # key. You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done. Listening to Custom Tones Do the following to listen to a custom tone:

Pick up the phone and press **** on your phones keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu. Press a number from 1201~1208 followed by the # key to listen to the tone. You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done. Deleting Custom Tones Do the following to delete a custom tone:

Pick up the phone and press **** on your phones keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu. Press a number from 1301~1308 followed by the # key to delete the tone of your choice. Press 14 followed by the # key if you wish to clear all your custom tones. You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done. 21.9.1 Quality of Service (QoS) Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real-time multimedia applications. Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS (Type of Service) values at the data source (for example, at the Zyxel Device) so a server can decide the best method of delivery, that is the least cost, fastest route and so on. Type of Service (ToS) DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCP) indicating the level of service desired. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 248 Chapter 21 VoIP This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.3 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. Figure 152 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field DSCP

(6-bit) Unused

(2-bit) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. 21.9.2 Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold, call waiting, and call transfer. are generally available from your VoIP service provider. The Zyxel Device supports the following services:

Call Return Call Hold Call Waiting Making a Second Call Call Transfer Call Forwarding Three-Way Conference Internal Calls Call Park and Pickup Do not Disturb IVR Call Completion CCBS Outgoing SIP 3. The Zyxel Device does not support DiffServ at the time of writing. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 249 Chapter 21 VoIP Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the Zyxel Device's phone ports, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider. 21.9.2.1 The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time (a few hundred milliseconds) before releasing it. On newer telephones, there should be a "flash" key (button) that generates the signal electronically. If the flash key is not available, you can tap (press and immediately release) the hook by hand to achieve the same effect. However, using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise. With manual tapping, if the duration is too long, it may be interpreted as hanging up by the Zyxel Device. You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key. 21.9.2.2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below. After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-command, the current operation will be aborted. Table 107 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash 0 1 2 3 Put a current call on hold to place a second call. Switch back to the call (if there is no second call). Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer. Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold. 1. Switch back and forth between two calls. 2. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call. 3. Separate the current three-way conference call into two individual calls

(one is on-line, the other is on hold). Create three-way conference connection.

*98#

Transfer the call to another phone. European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key. If you have another call, press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold. Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line. Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold. If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 250 Chapter 21 VoIP European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone

(directory) number. If there is a second call to a telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Take one of the following actions. Either press the flash key and press 1, or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings. Reject the second call. Press the flash key and then press 0. Disconnect the first call and answer the second call. Put the first call on hold and answer the second call. Press the flash key and then 2. European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold. 2 When you hear the dial tone, dial *98# followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone. European Three-Way Conference Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls. 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone, press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone. 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call. 3 When the second call is answered, press the flash key and press 3 to create a three-way conversation. Hang up the phone to drop the connection. 4 5 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (one is on-

line, the other is on hold), press the flash key and press 2. 21.9.2.3 USA Type Supplementary Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 251 Chapter 21 VoIP After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-command, the current operation will be aborted. Table 108 USA Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB-COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call. After the second call is successful, press the flash key again to have a three-way conference call. Flash

*98#

Transfer the call to another phone. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call. USA Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key. If you have another call, press the flash key to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold. If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring. USA Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone

(directory) number. If there is a second call to your telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call. USA Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone. 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold. 2 When you hear the dial tone, dial *98# followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone. USA Three-Way Conference Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls. 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone (party A), press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone. 2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call (to party B). 3 When party B answers the second call, press the flash key to create a three-way conversation. 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 252 Chapter 21 VoIP 5 6 7 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (with party A on-line and party B on hold), press the flash key. If you want to go back to the three-way conversation, press the flash key again. If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections again, press the flash key. This time the party B is on-line and party A is on hold. 21.9.2.4 Phone Functions Summary The following table shows the key combinations you can enter on your phones keypad to use certain features. Table 109 Phone Functions Summary ACTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

*98#

Call transfer Transfer a call to another phone. See Section 21.9.2.2 on page 250

(Europe type) and Section 21.9.2.3 on page 251 (USA type). Call return Place a call to the last person who called you. Enable Do Not Disturb Disable Do Not Disturb Enable Call Waiting Disable Call Waiting IVR Use these to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you, or to turn this function off. Use these to allow you to put a call on hold when you are answering another, or to turn this function off. Use these to set up Interactive Voice Response (IVR). IVR allows you to record custom caller ringing tones (the sound a caller hears before you pick up the phone) and on hold tones (the sound someone hears when you put their call on hold).

Internal Call Call the phone(s) connected to the Zyxel Device. One Shot Caller Display Call Activate or deactivate caller ID for the next call only. One Shot Caller Hidden Call

*66#

*95#

#95#

*41#

#41#

*82

*67 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 253 C H A P T E R 22 Log 22.1 Log Overview These screens allow you to determine the categories of events and/or alerts that the Zyxel Device logs and then display these logs or have the Zyxel Device send them to an administrator (through email) or to a syslog server. 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the System Log screen to see the system logs (Section 22.2 on page 255). Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select (Section 22.3 on page 256). 22.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Alerts and Logs Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server. Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels. Table 110 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY 0 1 2 3 4 Emergency: The system is unusable. Alert: Action must be taken immediately. Critical: The system condition is critical. Error: There is an error condition on the system. Warning: There is a warning condition on the system. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 254 Chapter 22 Log Table 110 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY 5 6 7 Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system. Informational: The syslog contains an informational message. Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes. 22.2 System Log Use this screen to see the system logs. You can filter the entries by selecting a severity level and/or category. Click System Monitor > Log > System Log to open the System Log screen. Figure 153 System Monitor > Log > System Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 111 System Monitor > Log > System Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Category Clear Log Refresh Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Zyxel Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Export Log Click this to save the current list of logs to your computer. E-mail Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the Email address you specify in the Maintenance > E-mail Notification screen.

Time Facility This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. Level This field displays the severity level of the log. Category This field displays the type of the log. Messages This field states the reason for the log. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 255 Chapter 22 Log 22.3 Security Log Use this screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select. You can filter the entries by selecting a severity level and/or category. Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen. Figure 154 System Monitor > Log > Security Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 112 System Monitor > Log > Security Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Category Clear Log Refresh Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Zyxel Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Export Log Click this to save the current list of logs to your computer. Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the Email address you specify in the Maintenance > E-mail Notification screen.

Time Facility This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. Level This field displays the severity level of the log. Category This field displays the type of the log. Messages This field states the reason for the log. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 256 C H A P T E R 23 Traffic Status 23.1 Traffic Status Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at the network traffic status and statistics of the WAN/LAN interfaces and NAT. 23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 23.2 on page 257). Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 23.3 on page 258). Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the Zyxel Devices client(s) (Section 23.4 on page 259). 23.2 WAN Status Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figures in this screen show the total number of bytes received and sent through the Zyxel Devices WAN interface(s). Packet statistics for each WAN interface are listed in the tables below. Figure 155 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN PX7511-B0 Users Guide 257 Chapter 23 Traffic Status The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 113 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Zyxel Device to update this screen. This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected. Connected Interface Packets Sent Packets Received Disabled Interface Packets Sent Packets Received Data Error Drop Data Error Drop Data Error Drop Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disabled. This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 23.3 LAN Status Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. This screen allows you to view packet statistics for each LAN or WLAN interface on the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 258 Chapter 23 Traffic Status Figure 156 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 114 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Zyxel Device to update this screen. Interface This shows the LAN or wireless LAN interface on the Zyxel Device. Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. Interface This shows the LAN or wireless LAN interfaces on the Zyxel Device. Sent (Packets) Data Error Drop Data Error Drop Received (Packets) This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 23.4 NAT Status Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT to open the following screen. This screen lists the devices that have received an IP address from the Zyxel Device LAN or WLAN interface(s) and have ever established a session with the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 259 Chapter 23 Traffic Status Figure 157 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 115 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Zyxel Device to update this screen. Device Name This displays the name of the connected host. IPv4 Address This displays the IP address of the connected host. MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the connected host. This displays the number of NAT sessions currently opened for the connected host. No. of Open Session Total This displays what percentage of NAT sessions the Zyxel Device can support is currently being used by all connected hosts. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 260 C H A P T E R 24 VoIP Status 24.1 The VoIP Status Screen Click System Monitor > VoIP Status to open the following screen. This screen displays VoIP registration status, current call status and other related information for each SIP account. You can also see the phone port to which the SIP account is mapped for outgoing or incoming calls in this screen. Figure 158 System Monitor > VoIP Status The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 116 System Monitor > VoIP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Poll Interval(s) Enter the number of seconds the Zyxel Device needs to wait before updating this screen and then click Set Interval. Click Stop to have the Zyxel Device stop updating this screen. SIP Status Account This column displays the index number of each SIP account that has already configured in the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 261 Chapter 24 VoIP Status Table 116 System Monitor > VoIP Status (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Register Action The switch is grayed out and cannot be configured if the SIP account is disabled. If the SIP account is not registered, you can click the switch to turn it on Device attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server. to have the Zyxel If the SIP account is already registered with a SIP server, setting the switch to off the SIP accounts registration in the SIP server. This does not cancel your SIP account, but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name. will delete Registration This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account. Registered - The SIP account is activated and has been registered with a SIP server. You can use it to make a VoIP call. Unregistered - The SIP account is activated, but the last time the Zyxel Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server, the attempt failed. Use the Register Action switch to register the account again. The Zyxel Device will also automatically try to register the SIP account again after a period of time that you configured in VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add/Edit > SIP Register Fail Re-Try Timer. Disabled - The SIP account is not active. Make sure the corresponding SIP Service Provider and SIP Account are both enabled in VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add/Edit and VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add/Edit. Registration Time This field displays the last time the Zyxel Device successfully registered the SIP account with the SIP server. The field is blank if this account is never successfully registered. URI Message Waiting This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account. You can change these in the VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add/Edit and VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add/Edit screens. This field indicates whether or not there are any new voice messages in the SIP account. You have to enable the MWI function in the VoIP >SIP > SIP Account > Add/Edit screen, and your VoIP service provider should also support the voice mail system and MWI feature. Last Incoming Number This field displays the last SIP number the peer device used to call the SIP account. The field is blank if there is never an incoming call for the SIP account. Last Outgoing Number This field displays the last SIP number that you called via this SIP account. The field is blank if you never dialed a number using the SIP account. Note: An outgoing number is recorded only after SIP outgoing call signaling procedure starts. Call Status (This table displays the status of all active and ongoing calls only.) Account This field displays the SIP number used to make an Outgoing Call or receive an Incoming Call through a SIP server. It shows the phone port number for an Internal call without a SIP server. Duration This field displays how long the current call has lasted. Note: The time calculation starts from the beginning of the call setup signaling procedure, rather than the moment when the call is successfully established. Status This field displays the current call progress or state of the phone call. Calling - The Zyxel Device sends an INVITE request to make an Outgoing Call or Internal Call. The callees phone is ringing. Ringing - There is an Incoming call. The phone attached to the Zyxel Devices phone port associated with the SIP account is ringing. InCall - There is a call in progress. Voice data is exchanged between both parties. Hold - An Outgoing Call or Incoming Call is placed on hold. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 262 Chapter 24 VoIP Status Table 116 System Monitor > VoIP Status (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Call Type This field displays the type of the current VoIP call. Outgoing Call - This is a call that you originated using a SIP account. Incoming Call - This is a call that you received for a SIP account. Internal Call - This is a VoIP call between two phone ports without a SIP server. When you have phones attached to both of the Zyxel Devices phone ports, you can dial #### to place a call to the phone(s) connected to the other port. Codec This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone port. It shows Unknown when Status is Calling or Ringing (before both parties agree on a codec). From Phone Port Type This field displays the phone port type used to originate the current VoIP call. It shows SIP for an Incoming Call and FXS for an Outgoing Call or Internal Call. To Phone Port Type This field displays the phone port type used to receive the current VoIP call. It shows SIP for an Outgoing Call and FXS for an Incoming Call or Internal Call. When an Incoming Calls Status is Ringing, the phone port type is Unknown. Peer Number This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port. It shows #### for an Internal Call. Phone Status (This table displays the name and the SIP account binding relationship of different local phone ports. The SIP account binding relationship can be configured in VoIP > Phone > Phone Device.) Phone This field displays the name of each phone port on the Zyxel Device. This field displays the SIP number that you use to make outgoing calls on this phone port. This field displays the SIP number that you use to receive incoming calls on this phone port. Outgoing Number Incoming Number PX7511-B0 Users Guide 263 C H A P T E R 25 ARP Table 25.1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network. An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address. 25.1.1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device, the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device. If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target MAC field

(FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied. 25.2 ARP Table Settings Use the ARP table to view the IPv4-to-MAC address mapping(s) for each device connected to the Zyxel Device. The neighbor table shows the IPv6-to-MAC address mapping(s) of each neighbor. To open this screen, click System Monitor > ARP Table. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 264 Chapter 25 ARP Table Figure 159 System Monitor > ARP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 117 System Monitor > ARP Table DESCRIPTION LABEL

IPv4/IPv6 Address This is the index number of the ARP or neighbor table entry. This is the learned IPv4 or IPv6 IP address of a device connected to a port on the Zyxel Device. MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address. Device This is the name of the Zyxel Devices interface to which the device is connected. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 265 C H A P T E R 26 Routing Table 26.1 Routing Table Overview Routing is based on the destination address only and the Zyxel Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet. 26.2 Routing Table Settings The table below shows IPv4 and IPv6 routing information. The IPv4 subnet mask is 255.255.255.255 for a host destination and 0.0.0.0 for the default route. The gateway address is written as *(IPv4)/::(IPv6) if none is set. Click System Monitor > Routing Table to open the following screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 266 Chapter 26 Routing Table Figure 160 System Monitor > Routing Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 118 System Monitor > Routing Table LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4/IPv6 Routing Table Destination This indicates the destination IPv4 address or IPv6 address and prefix of this route. Gateway This indicates the IPv4 address or IPv6 address of the gateway that helps forward this routes traffic. Subnet Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of the IPv4 route. Flag This indicates the route status. U-Up: The route is up.

!-Reject: The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail. G-Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic. H-Host: The target of the route is a host. R-Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing. D-Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect. M-Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 267 Chapter 26 Routing Table Table 118 System Monitor > Routing Table (continued) LABEL Metric DESCRIPTION The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower the

"cost". Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded. brx indicates a LAN interface where x can be 0~3 to represent LAN1 to LAN4 respectively. ethx indicates an Ethernet WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode. ppp0 indicates a WAN interface using PPPoE. wlx indicates a wireless interface where x can be 0~1. For some models, wl1 indicates 5 GHz wireless interface, and wl0 indicates 2.4 GHz wireless interface. For the other models, wl1 indicates 5 GHz wireless interface, and wl0 indicates 2.4 GHz wireless interface. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 268 C H A P T E R 27 Multicast Status 27.1 Multicast Status Overview Use the Multicast Status screens to view IPv4 or IPv6 multicast group information. 27.2 IGMP Status Use this screen to look at the current list of IPv4 multicast groups the Zyxel Device manages through IGMP. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. You can configure IGMP settings in Network Setting > IGMP/MLD. To open this screen, click System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status. Figure 161 System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 119 System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status LABEL Refresh Interface DESCRIPTION Click this button to update the information on this screen. This field displays the name of the Zyxel Devices interface that belongs to an IGMP multicast group. Multicast Group This field displays the address of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs. Filter Mode INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast groups traffic. EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic but other IP addresses can. Source List This lists the IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic depending on the filter mode. Member This lists the IP address of members currently in the multicast group. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 269 Chapter 27 Multicast Status 27.3 MLD Status Use this screen to look at the current list of IPv6 multicast groups the Zyxel Device manages through MLD. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3. You can configure MLD settings in Network Setting > IGMP/MLD. To open this screen, click System Monitor > Multicast Status >

MLD Status. Figure 162 System Monitor > Multicast Status > MLD Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 120 System Monitor > Multicast Status > MLD Status DESCRIPTION Click this button to update the status on this screen. LABEL Refresh Interface This field displays the name of the Zyxel Devices interface that belongs to an MLD multicast group. Multicast Group This field displays the address of the MLD multicast group to which the interface belongs. Filter Mode INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast groups traffic. EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic but other IP addresses can. Source List This lists the IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic depending on the filter mode. Member This lists the IP address of members currently in the multicast group. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 270 C H A P T E R 28 WLAN Station Status 28.1 WLAN Station Status Overview Click System Monitor > WLAN Station Status to open the following screen. Use this screen to view information and status of the wireless stations (wireless clients) that are currently associated with the Zyxel Device. Being associated means that a wireless client (for example, your computer with a wireless network card installed) has connected successfully to an AP (or wireless router) using the same SSID, channel, and WiFi security settings. Figure 163 System Monitor > WLAN Station Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 121 System Monitor > WLAN Station Status DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station. MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station. LABEL

Rate (Mbps) RSSI (dBm) This field displays the transmission rate of WiFi traffic between an associated wireless station and the Zyxel Device. The RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) field shows the WiFi signal strength of the stations wireless connection. The normal range is -30dBm to -79dBm. If the value drops below -80dBm, try moving the associated wireless station closer to the Zyxel Device to get better signal strength. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 271 Chapter 28 WLAN Station Status Table 121 System Monitor > WLAN Station Status DESCRIPTION LABEL SNR Level The Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power. The greater the number, the better the quality of WiFi. The normal range is 15 to 40. If the value drops below 15, try moving the associated wireless station closer to the Zyxel Device to get better quality WiFi. This field displays a number which represents the strength of the WiFi signal between an associated wireless station and the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device uses the RSSI and SNR values to determine the strength of the WiFi signal. 5 means the Zyxel Device is receiving an excellent WiFi signal. 4 means the Zyxel Device is receiving a very good WiFi signal. 3 means the Zyxel Device is receiving a weak WiFi signal, 2 means the Zyxel Device is receiving a very weak WiFi signal. 1 means the Zyxel Device is not receiving a WiFi signal. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 272 C H A P T E R 29 xPON Status 29.1 Overview You can view the real-time optical transceiver information and operating parameters on the PON port. The parameters include, for example, transmitting and receiving power, and module temperature. 29.2 xPON Status Screen Click System Monitor > xPON Status to open the following screen. Use this screen to view the current PON transceiver status. Figure 164 System Monitor > xPON Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 122 System Monitor > xPON Status LABEL DESCRIPTION xPON Information RX power signal This displays the amount of power (in dBm) the PON transceiver is receiving from the fiber optic cable. TX power signal This displays the amount of power (in dBm) the PON transceiver is transmitting. Temperature This displays the temperature inside the PON transceiver in degrees Celsius. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 273 C H A P T E R 30 System In the System screen, you can name your Zyxel Device (Host) and give it an associated domain name for identification purposes. 30.1 System Overview 30.2 System Settings Click Maintenance > System to open the following screen. Assign a unique name to the Zyxel Device so it can be easily recognized on your network. You can use up to 30 characters, including spaces. Figure 165 Maintenance > System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 123 Maintenance > System LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name Type a host name for your Zyxel Device. Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes. Domain Name Type a Domain name for your Zyxel Device. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 274 C H A P T E R 31 User Account 31.1 User Account Overview In the User Account screen, you can view the settings of the admin and other user accounts that you use to log into the Zyxel Device. 31.2 User Account Settings Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen. Use this screen to create or manage user accounts and their privileges on the Zyxel Device. Figure 166 Maintenance > User Account The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 124 Maintenance > User Account DESCRIPTION Click this button to add a new user account. LABEL Add New Account

Active Retry Times Idle Timeout This is the index number of the user account. This field indicates whether the user account is active or not. Clear the check box to disable the user account. Select the check box to enable it. User Name This field displays the name of the account used to log into the Zyxel Device web configurator. This field displays the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this account. 0 means there is no limit. This field displays the length of inactive time before the Zyxel Device will automatically log the user out of the web configurator. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 275 Chapter 31 User Account Table 124 Maintenance > User Account (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Lock Period This field displays the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after a number if consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times. This field displays whether this user has Administrator or User privileges. Group Modify Cancel Apply Click the Edit icon to configure the entry. Click the Delete icon to remove the entry. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 31.2.1 User Account Add/Edit Click Add New Account or the Edit icon of an existing account in the Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen. Figure 167 Maintenance > User Account > Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 125 Maintenance > User Account > Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Active Password Verify New Password Retry Times Select Enable or Disable to activate or deactivate the user account. User Name Enter a new name for the account. This field displays the name of an existing account. Type your new system password (up to 256 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the Zyxel Device. Type the new password again for confirmation. Enter the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this account. 0 means there is no limit. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 276 Chapter 31 User Account Table 125 Maintenance > User Account > Add/Edit (continued) (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Idle Timeout Lock Period Group Cancel OK Enter the length of inactive time before the Zyxel Device will automatically log the user out of the Web Configurator. Enter the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after a number if consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times. Specify whether this user will have Administrator or User privileges. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 277 C H A P T E R 32 Remote Management 32.1 Remote Management Overview Use remote management to control through which interface(s), each service can access the Zyxel Device. Note: The Zyxel Device is managed using the Web Configurator. 32.2 MGMT Services Use this screen to configure through which interface(s), each service can access the Zyxel Device. You can also specify service port numbers computers must use to connect to the Zyxel Device. Click Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services to open the following screen. Figure 168 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services PX7511-B0 Users Guide 278 Chapter 32 Remote Management The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 126 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Interface used for services Select Any_WAN to have the Zyxel Device automatically activate the remote management service when any WAN connection is up. Select Multi_WAN and then select one or more WAN connections to have the Zyxel Device activate the remote management service when the selected WAN connections are up. Service This is the service you may use to access the Zyxel Device. LAN/WLAN WAN Trust Domain Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Zyxel Device from the LAN/WLAN. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Zyxel Device from all WAN connections. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Zyxel Device from the trusted hosts configured in the Maintenance > Remote MGMT > Trust Domain screen. If you only want certain WAN connections to have access to the Zyxel Device using the corresponding services, then clear WAN, select Trust Domain and configure the allowed IP address(es) in the Trust Domain screen. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. Port Cancel Apply 32.3 Trust Domain Use this screen to view a list of public IP addresses which are allowed to access the Zyxel Device through the services configured in the Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services screen. Click Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain to open the following screen. Note: If specific services from the trusted hosts are allowed access but the trust domain list is empty, all public IP addresses can access the Zyxel Device from the WAN using the specified services. Figure 169 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain PX7511-B0 Users Guide 279 Chapter 32 Remote Management The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 127 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Trust Domain Click this to add a trusted host IP address. IP Address This field shows a trusted host IP address. Delete Click the Delete icon to remove the trust IP address. 32.3.1 Add Trust Domain Use this screen to configure a public IP address which is allowed to access the Zyxel Device. Click the Add Trust Domain button in the Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain screen to open the following screen. Figure 170 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain > Add Trust Domain The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 128 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain > Add Trust Domain DESCRIPTION LABEL IP Address Cancel OK Enter a public IP address which is allowed to access the service on the Zyxel Device from the WAN. You can enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address and subnet mask or prefix length. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click OK to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 280 C H A P T E R 33 SNMP 33.1 SNMP Overview This screen allows you to configure the SNMP settings on the Zyxel Device. The Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. Your Zyxel Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Zyxel Device through the network. The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. Figure 171 SNMP Management Model An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of components: agents and a manager. An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the Zyxel Device). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include the number of packets received, node port status, and so on. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 281 Chapter 33 SNMP SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:

Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent. GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations. Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent. Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events. 33.2 SNMP Settings Click Maintenance > SNMP to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Device SNMP settings. Configure how the Zyxel Device reports to the Network Management System (NMS) via SNMP using the screen below. Figure 172 Maintenance > SNMP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 129 Maintenance > SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION SNMP Agent Enable this switch to let the Zyxel Device act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Zyxel Device through the network, Click on this switch to enable/disable it. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Get Community Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 282 Chapter 33 SNMP Table 129 Maintenance > SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Set Community Enter the Set Community, which is the password for the incoming Set requests from the management station. Trap Community Enter the Trap Community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. The default is public and allows all requests. System Name Enter the SNMP system name. System Location Enter the SNMP system location. System Contact Enter the SNMP system contact. Trap Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to. Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Zyxel Device. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 283 C H A P T E R 34 Time Settings 34.1 Time Settings Overview This chapter shows you how to configure the Zyxel Devices system date and time. 34.2 Time For effective scheduling and logging, the Zyxel Device system time must be accurate. Use this screen to configure the Zyxel Devices time based on your local time zone. You can enter a time server address, select the time zone where the Zyxel Device is physically located, and configure Daylight Savings settings if needed. Click Maintenance > Time to open the following screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 284 Chapter 34 Time Settings Figure 173 Maintenance > Time PX7511-B0 Users Guide 285 Chapter 34 Time Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 130 Maintenance > Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Date/Time Current Time This field displays the time of your Zyxel Device. Each time you reload this page, the Zyxel Device synchronizes the time with the time server. Current Date This field displays the date of your Zyxel Device. Each time you reload this page, the Zyxel Device synchronizes the date with the time server. Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box. Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Select None if you dont want to configure the time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Time and Date Setup First ~ Fifth Time Server Address Time Zone Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight Savings Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Active Click this switch to enable or disable Daylight Saving Time. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Start Rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Hour field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States, set the day to Second, Sunday, the month to March and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday and the month to March. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). End Rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Hour field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the month to November and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday, and the month to October. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Cancel Apply Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 286 C H A P T E R 35 Email Notification 35.1 Email Notification Overview A mail server is an application or a computer that can receive, forward and deliver email messages. To have the Zyxel Device send reports, logs or notifications via email, you must specify an email server and the email addresses of the sender and receiver. 35.2 Email Notification Settings Click Maintenance > Email Notification to open the Email Notification screen. Use this screen to view, remove and add Email account information on the Zyxel Device. This account can be set to receive email notifications for logs. Note: The default port number of the mail server is 25. Figure 174 Maintenance > Email Notification The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 131 Maintenance > Email Notification LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New e-mail Click this button to create a new entry. This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server. Mail Server Address Port Security Username This field displays the user name of the senders mail account. This field displays the port number of the mail server. This field displays the protocol used for encryption. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 287 Chapter 35 Email Notification Table 131 Maintenance > Email Notification (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Email Address This field displays the email address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the email that the Zyxel Device sends. Remove Click this to delete the entry. 35.2.1 Email Notification Edit Click the Add button in the Email Notification screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for sending email via a mail server. Figure 175 Email Notification > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 132 Email Notification > Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Mail Server Address Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the email address specified in the Account Email Address field. If this field is left blank, reports, logs or notifications will not be sent via email. Port Enter the same port number here as is on the mail server for mail traffic. Authentication Username Enter the user name (up to 32 characters). This is usually the user name of a mail account you specified in the Account Email Address field. Authentication Password Enter the password associated with the user name above. Account Email Address Enter the email address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the email notification that the Zyxel Device sends. If you activate SSL/TLS authentication, the email address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well. Connection Security Select SSL to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) if you want encrypted communications between the mail server and the Zyxel Device. Select STARTTLS to upgrade a plain text connection to a secure connection using SSL/TLS. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 288 Chapter 35 Email Notification Table 132 Email Notification > Add (continued) DESCRIPTION Click this button to exit this screen without saving. LABEL Cancel OK Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 289 C H A P T E R 36 Log Setting 36.1 Logs Setting Overview You can configure where the Zyxel Device sends logs and which type of logs the Zyxel Device records in the Logs Setting screen. 36.2 Log Settings To change your Zyxel Devices log settings, click Maintenance > Log Setting. The screen appears as shown. If you have a LAN client on your network or a remote server that is running a syslog utility, you can also save its log files by enabling Syslog Logging, selecting Remote or Local File and Remote in the Mode field, and entering the IP address of the LAN client in the Syslog Server field. Remote allows you to store logs on a syslog server, while Local File allows you to store them on the Zyxel Device. Local File and Remote means your logs are stored both on the Zyxel Device and on a syslog server. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 290 Chapter 36 Log Setting Figure 176 Maintenance > Log Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 133 Maintenance > Log Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Setting Syslog Logging The Zyxel Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Click this switch to enable or disable to enable syslog logging. When the switch goes to the right Otherwise, it is not.

, the function is enabled. Mode Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box. If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file, select Local File and Remote. Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 291 Chapter 36 Log Setting Table 133 Maintenance > Log Setting (continued) DESCRIPTION Enter the port number used by the syslog server. LABEL UDP Port Email Log Settings Email Log Settings Mail Account Click this switch to have the Zyxel Device send logs and alarm messages to the configured email addresses. When the switch goes to the right

, the function is enabled. Otherwise, it is not. Select a mail account from which you want to send logs. You can configure mail accounts in the Maintenance > Email Notification screen. System Log Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log email message that the Zyxel Device sends. Security Log Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log email message that the Zyxel Device sends. Send Log to The Zyxel Device sends logs to the email address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the Zyxel Device does not send logs via email. Send Alarm to Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the email address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via email. Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated. Active Log Cancel Apply System Log Select the categories of system logs that you want to record. Security Log Select the categories of security logs that you want to record. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. 36.2.1 Example Email Log An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by email. You may edit the subject title. The date format here is Day-Month-Year. The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.

"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 292 Chapter 36 Log Setting Figure 177 Email Log Example Subject:

Firewall Alert From Date:

Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42 From:

user@zyxel.com To:

user@zyxel.com 1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward

| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |

..{snip}.. .{snip}.. 126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

End of Firewall Log PX7511-B0 Users Guide 293 C H A P T E R 37 Firmware Upgrade 37.1 Firmware Upgrade Overview This screen lets you upload new firmware to your Zyxel Device. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest Zyxel FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Zyxel Device. 37.2 Firmware Upgrade Settings Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. Download the latest firmware file from the Zyxel website and upload it to your Zyxel Device using this screen. The upload process uses HTTP

(Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the Zyxel Device will reboot. Do NOT turn off the Zyxel Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 178 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Zyxel Device again. Table 134 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Upgrade Firmware Restore Default Settings After Firmware Upgrade Current Firmware Version Select the check box to have the Zyxel Device automatically reset itself after the new firmware is uploaded. This is the present Firmware version and the date created. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 294 Chapter 37 Firmware Upgrade Table 134 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Browse Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Figure 179 Firmware Uploading After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen. Figure 180 Error Message Note that the Zyxel Device automatically restarts during the upload, causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Network Temporarily Disconnected PX7511-B0 Users Guide 295 C H A P T E R 38 Backup and Restore 38.1 Backup/Restore Overview The Backup/Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. 38.2 Backup/Restore Settings Click Maintenance > Backup/Restore. Information related to factory default settings and backup configuration are shown in this screen. You can also use this to restore previous device configurations. Figure 181 Maintenance > Backup/Restore Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the Zyxel Devices current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your Zyxel Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the Zyxel Devices current configuration to your computer. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 296 Chapter 38 Backup and Restore Restore Configuration Table 135 Restore Configuration DESCRIPTION LABEL File Path Browse Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Zyxel Device. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed

(.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Upload Click this to begin the upload process. Do NOT turn off the Zyxel Device while configuration file upload is in progress. After the Zyxel Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the Zyxel Device. The Zyxel Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 182 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Backup/

Restore screen. Figure 183 Configuration Upload Error Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Zyxel Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 297 Chapter 38 Backup and Restore Figure 184 Reset Warning Message Figure 185 Reset In Process Message You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Zyxel Device. Refer to Section 1.5.4 on page 23 for more information on the RESET button. 38.3 Reboot System Reboot allows you to reboot the Zyxel Device remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the Zyxel Device hangs, for example. Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the Zyxel Device reboot. This does not affect the Zyxel Device's configuration. Figure 186 Maintenance > Reboot PX7511-B0 Users Guide 298 C H A P T E R 39 Diagnostic 39.1 Diagnostic Overview The Diagnostic screen displays information to help you identify problems with the Zyxel Device. 39.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Diagnostic screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host (Section 39.2 on page 299). 39.2 Diagnostic Screen Use this screen to use ping, traceroute, or nslookup for troubleshooting. Ping and traceroute are used to test whether a particular host is reachable. After entering an IP address and clicking on one of the buttons to start a test, the results will be shown in the Ping/Traceroute Test area. Use nslookup to find the IP address for a host name and vice versa. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic to open the screen shown next. Figure 187 Maintenance > Diagnostic PX7511-B0 Users Guide 299 Chapter 39 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 136 Maintenance > Diagnostic DESCRIPTION LABEL Address Ping Ping 6 Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in order to test a connection. Click this to ping the IPv4 address that you entered. Click this to ping the IPv6 address that you entered. Trace Route Click this to display the route path and transmission delays between the Zyxel Device to the IPv4 address that you entered. Trace Route 6 Click this to display the route path and transmission delays between the Zyxel Device to the IPv6 address that you entered. Nslookup Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 300 C H A P T E R 40 GPON The Subscriber Location ID (SLID) identifies your device to the GPON service providers Optical Line Terminal (OLT). If your GPON service provider gave you an SLID to use, enter it in this screen. 40.1 Overview 40.2 SLID To change your Zyxel Devices SLID setting, click Maintenance > GPON > SLID to open the following screen. Figure 188 Maintenance > GPON > SLID The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 137 Maintenance > GPON > SLID DESCRIPTION LABEL SLID Value Cancel Apply Enter the SLID used for gaining access to the service providers network. It is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Click Apply to save your changes. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 301 PART III Troubleshooting and Appendices Appendices contain general information. Some information may not apply to your device. 302 C H A P T E R 41 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs Zyxel Device Access and Login Internet Access Wireless Internet Access UPnP 41.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The Zyxel Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the Zyxel Device is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adapter included with the Zyxel Device. 3 Make sure the power adapter is connected to the Zyxel Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. Turn the Zyxel Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Table 2 on page 20. 2 Check the hardware connections. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the Zyxel Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 303 4 5 3 4 5 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 41.2 Zyxel Device Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the Zyxel Device. The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1. 1 2 1 2 4 5 6 If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the Zyxel Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the Zyxel Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. 3 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.5.4 on page 23. I forgot the password. See the cover page for the default login names and associated passwords. If those do not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.5.4 on page 23. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 8.2 on page 119), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Zyxel Device. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Table 2 on 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java page 20. enabled. If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and HTTPS

(Maintenance > Remote Management). Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Zyxel Device with the default IP address. See Section 1.5.4 on page 23. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 304 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting Advanced Suggestions Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser. Try to access the Zyxel Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Zyxel Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Zyxel Device does not respond to HTTP. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Zyxel Device. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. See the cover page for the default login names and associated passwords. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. You cannot log in to the Web Configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Zyxel Device. Log out of the Zyxel Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the Zyxel Device off and on. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 41.1 on page 303. 2 3 4 I cannot Telnet to the Zyxel Device. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload/download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. 41.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Table 2 on page 20. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Setting > Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 305 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled WiFi in the Zyxel Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the Zyxel Device. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them. 5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot connect to the Internet using an Ethernet connection. 1 Make sure you have the Ethernet WAN port connected to a MODEM or Router. 2 Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet WAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled. 3 Check that the WAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the Ethernet connection (Network Setting > Interface Group). 4 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISPs DHCP server. I cannot access the Zyxel Device anymore. I had access to the Zyxel Device, but my connection is not available anymore. 1 Your session with the Zyxel Device may have expired. Try logging into the Zyxel Device again. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Table 2 on page 20. Turn the Zyxel Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact your vendor. 3 4 41.4 Wireless Internet Access What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?

The following factors may cause interference:

Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on. Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 306 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices. To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:

Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low. Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones. Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client. APs if necessary. Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?

41.5 UPnP An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a wireless network must use the same SSID. When using UPnP and the Zyxel Device reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My Network Places > Local Network. 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Zyxel Devices LAN port or from your computer. 2 Re-connect the Ethernet cable. The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen. Restart your computer. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 307 A P P E N D I X A Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a Zyxel office for the region in which you bought the device. See https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Required Information Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide) Taiwan Zyxel Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com Asia China Zyxel Communications (Shanghai) Corp. Zyxel Communications (Beijing) Corp. Zyxel Communications (Tianjin) Corp. https://www.zyxel.com/cn/zh/

India Zyxel Technology India Pvt Ltd https://www.zyxel.com/in/en/

Kazakhstan Zyxel Kazakhstan https://www.zyxel.kz PX7511-B0 Users Guide 308 Appendix A Customer Support Korea Zyxel Korea Corp. http://www.zyxel.kr Malaysia Zyxel Malaysia Sdn Bhd. http://www.zyxel.com.my Pakistan Zyxel Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.pk Philippines Zyxel Philippines http://www.zyxel.com.ph Singapore Zyxel Singapore Pte Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.sg Taiwan Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/

Thailand Zyxel Thailand Co., Ltd https://www.zyxel.com/th/th/

Vietnam Belarus Zyxel BY Belgium https://www.zyxel.by Zyxel Communications B.V. https://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/

Zyxel Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office https://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi Europe PX7511-B0 Users Guide 309 Appendix A Customer Support https://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/

Bulgaria Zyxel https://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/

Czech Republic Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o https://www.zyxel.com/cz/cs/

Denmark Zyxel Communications A/S https://www.zyxel.com/dk/da/

Estonia Zyxel Estonia https://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/

Finland Zyxel Communications https://www.zyxel.com/fi/fi/

France Zyxel France https://www.zyxel.fr Germany Zyxel Deutschland GmbH https://www.zyxel.com/de/de/

Hungary Zyxel Hungary & SEE https://www.zyxel.com/hu/hu/

Italy Zyxel Communications Italy https://www.zyxel.com/it/it/

Latvia Zyxel Latvia https://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/

PX7511-B0 Users Guide 310 Appendix A Customer Support Lithuania Zyxel Lithuania https://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/

Netherlands Zyxel Benelux https://www.zyxel.com/nl/nl/

Norway Zyxel Communications https://www.zyxel.com/no/no/

Poland Zyxel Communications Poland https://www.zyxel.com/pl/pl/

Romania Zyxel Romania https://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro Russia Zyxel Russia Slovakia https://www.zyxel.com/ru/ru/

https://www.zyxel.com/sk/sk/

Spain Zyxel Communications ES Ltd https://www.zyxel.com/es/es/

Sweden Zyxel Communications https://www.zyxel.com/se/sv/

Switzerland Studerus AG https://www.zyxel.ch/de https://www.zyxel.ch/fr Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka PX7511-B0 Users Guide 311 Appendix A Customer Support South America Turkey Zyxel Turkey A.S. https://www.zyxel.com/tr/tr/

UK Zyxel Communications UK Ltd. https://www.zyxel.com/uk/en/

Ukraine Zyxel Ukraine http://www.ua.zyxel.com Argentina Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Brazil Zyxel Communications Brasil Ltda. https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/

Colombia Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Ecuador Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

South America Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/co/es/

Middle East Israel Zyxel Communications Corporation http://il.zyxel.com/

PX7511-B0 Users Guide 312 Appendix A Customer Support Middle East Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/me/en/

Zyxel Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters https://www.zyxel.com/us/en/

North America USA Oceania Africa Australia Zyxel Communications Corporation https://www.zyxel.com/au/en/

South Africa Nology (Pty) Ltd. https://www.zyxel.com/za/en/

PX7511-B0 Users Guide 313 A P P E N D I X B IPv6 Overview IPv6 Addressing IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. Link-local Address A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-

local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as follows. Table 138 Link-local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 314 Appendix B IPv6 Unspecified Address Loopback Address Multicast Address An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address. It is similar to 0.0.0.0 in IPv4. A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to 127.0.0.1 in IPv4. In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group. Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses. Table 139 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION All hosts on a local node. All routers on a local node. All hosts on a local connected link. All routers on a local connected link. All routers on a local site. All DHCP severs on a local site. The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group. Table 140 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 315 Appendix B IPv6 Table 140 Reserved Multicast Address (continued) MULTICAST ADDRESS FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character

(1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should have a unique interface ID. Interface ID EUI-64 The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the following example. MAC 00

: 13

: 49

: 12

: 34

: 56 EUI-64 02

: 13

: 49

: FF

: FE

: 12

: 34

: 56 Identity Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information. The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 316 Appendix B IPv6 T2 T1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Rebind to S2 Rebind to S2 DHCP Relay Agent Prefix Delegation ICMPv6 A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network. The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-

Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts. Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Zyxel Device uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs) regularly by multicast, the Zyxel Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping". Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track neighbors reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:

Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbors link-layer address (MAC address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being reachable means it responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement message. Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address. Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 317 Appendix B IPv6 Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters. IPv6 Cache An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router list. The Zyxel Device maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response messages. In IPv6, the Zyxel Device configures a link-local address automatically, and then sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be resolved or verified, the Zyxel Device also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Zyxel Device receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbors link-layer address in the neighbor cache. When the Zyxel Device uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement message, it adds the routers information to the neighbor cache, prefix list and destination cache. The Zyxel Device creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router. When the Zyxel Device needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Zyxel Device uses the prefix list to determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing through a router. If the address is unlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the Zyxel Device determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP address is known, the Zyxel Device looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Zyxel Device cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages. Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4. MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join. MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message for that address. An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 318 Appendix B IPv6 Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses. C:\>ipv6 install Installing... Succeeded. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IP Address. : 10.1.1.46 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 IP Address. : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4 Default Gateway . : 10.1.1.254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer. Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.) This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:

1 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer. 2 After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service. 3 Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. 4 Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 319 Appendix B IPv6 5 Click Start and then OK. 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer. To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:

1 2 Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection. Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it. 3 Click OK to save the change. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 320 4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 5 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address

(2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IPv6 Address. : 2001:b021:2d::1000 Link-local IPv6 Address . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11 IPv4 Address. : 172.16.100.61 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11 172.16.100.254 Appendix B IPv6 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 321 A P P E N D I X C Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 322 Appendix C Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. 5190 AOLs Internet Messenger service. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Table 141 Examples of Services AIM AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP ESP (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP TCP DNS FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP ICQ IKE IMAP4 IMAP4S IRC NetBIOS NEW-ICQ NEWS 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 20 21 1 2 1720 80 443 500 143 993 6667 1863 137 138 139 445 5190 144 Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for instance www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by email. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-

commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for email. This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN. An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. User-Defined IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program. TCP/UDP This is another popular Internet chat program. MSN Messenger TCP PX7511-B0 Users Guide 323 Appendix C Services Table 141 Examples of Services (continued) PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 ROADRUNNER TCP/UDP NAME NFS NNTP PING POP3 POP3S PPTP RCMD REAL_AUDIO REXEC RLOGIN RTELNET RTSP SFTP SMTP SMTPS SNMP SNMP-TRAPS SQL-NET SSDP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG User-Defined UDP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP TCP/UDP UDP UDP UDP 2049 119 1 110 995 1723 512 7070 514 513 1026 107 554 115 25 465 161 162 1521 1900 22 1558 514 Network File System - NFS is a client/server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get email from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol

(RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-

exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one email server to another. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP). Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 324 Appendix C Services Table 141 Examples of Services (continued) PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION NAME TACACS TELNET VDOLIVE UDP TCP TCP UDP 49 23 7000 user-

defined Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 325 A P P E N D I X D Legal Information Copyright Disclaimer Copyright 2019 by Zyxel Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Zyxel Communications Corporation. Published by Zyxel Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Zyxel does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. Zyxel further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Regulatory Notice and Statement UNITED STATES of AMERICA The following information applies if you use the product within USA area. FCC EMC Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the devices Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receivers Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance The following information applies if you use the product with RF function within USA area. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must be at least 27 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or Operation of this device is restricted to indoor use only, except for relevant user's manual mention that this device can be installed into the transmitter. external environment. CANADA The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area. Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada ICES Statement CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) PX7511-B0 Users Guide 326 Appendix D Legal Information Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 Statement This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This radio transmitter (2468C-EX5510B0) has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have, a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Antenna Information 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NO. MODEL NAME MANUFACTURER GAIN CONNECTOR 65-034-000014B 65-034-000015B 65-034-000016B 65-034-000017B 65-034-000018B 65-034-000019B 65-034-000020B 65-034-000021B TYPE Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain 0.12 dBi (2.4~2.4835 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0.12 dBi (2.4~2.4835 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0.12 dBi (2.4~2.4835 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0.12 dBi (2.4~2.4835 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0 dBi (5.15~5.85 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0 dBi (5.15~5.85 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0 dBi (5.15~5.85 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0 dBi (5.15~5.85 GHz) i-pex(MHF) If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz, the following attention must be paid, The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate; and Where applicable, antenna type(s), antenna model(s), and the worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.2.3 of RSS 247 shall be clearly indicated. If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz, the following attention must be paid. For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit. L'metteur/rcepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) L'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Le prsent metteur radio (2468C-EX5510B0) a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne numrs ci dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, et dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. Informations Antenne NO. MODEL NAME MANUFACTURER GAIN CONNECTOR 65-034-000014B 65-034-000015B 65-034-000016B 65-034-000017B 65-034-000018B 65-034-000019B 65-034-000020B 65-034-000021B TYPE Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Dipole Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain Airgain 0.12 dBi (2.4~2.4835 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0.12 dBi (2.4~2.4835 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0.12 dBi (2.4~2.4835 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0.12 dBi (2.4~2.4835 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0 dBi (5.15~5.85 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0 dBi (5.15~5.85 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0 dBi (5.15~5.85 GHz) i-pex(MHF) 0 dBi (5.15~5.85 GHz) i-pex(MHF) Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz est active pour ce produit , il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande de 5 150 5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation l'intrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

Pour les dispositifs munis d'antennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5 725 5 850 MHz) doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. spcifie, selon le cas;

Lorsqu'il y a lieu, les types d'antennes (s'il y en a plusieurs), les numros de modle de l'antenne et les pires angles d'inclinaison ncessaires pour rester conforme l'exigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque d'lvation, nonce la section 6.2.2.3 du CNR-247, doivent tre clairement indiqus. Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz est active pour ce produit , il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes. Pour les dispositifs munis dantennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes de 5 250 5 350 MHz et de 5 470 5 725 MHz doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 327 Appendix D Legal Information Industry Canada radiation exposure statement This device complies with ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 32 cm between the radiator and your body. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements ISED tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 32 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. EUROPEAN UNION The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive, RED) Compliance information for wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). And this product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 2014/53/EU) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below table:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. Zyxel recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for the 5GHz wireless LANs. If this device for operation in the band 5150-5350 MHz, it is for indoor use only. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radio equipment and your body.

(Bulgarian) Zyxel , 2014/53/C. National Restrictions The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Por medio de la presente Zyxel declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 2014/53/UE.. Zyxel tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 2014/53/EU. Dansk (Danish) Undertegnede Zyxel erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 2014/53/EU. National Restrictions In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage. I Danmark m frekvensbndet 5150 - 5350 ogs anvendes udendrs. Hiermit erklrt Zyxel, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab Zyxel seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 2014/53/EL phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Zyxel 2014/53/EE. Hereby, Zyxel declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. Par la prsente Zyxel dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 2014/53/UE. Zyxel ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/UE. Hr me lsir, Zyxel v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 2014/53/

UE. Espaol

(Spanish) etina

(Czech) Deutsch

(German) Eesti keel

(Estonian)

(Greek) English Franais

(French) Hrvatski

(Croatian) slenska

(Icelandic) PX7511-B0 Users Guide 328 Appendix D Legal Information Italiano (Italian) Con la presente Zyxel dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 2014/53/UE. National Restrictions This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Ar o Zyxel deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 2014/53/ES btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Latvieu valoda

(Latvian) National Restrictions The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please 2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk check http://www.esd.lv for more details. informcijas: http://www.esd.lv. Lietuvi kalba

(Lithuanian) iuo Zyxel deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 2014/53/ES Direktyvos nuostatas. Magyar

(Hungarian) Alulrott, Zyxel nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 2014/53/EU irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Malti (Maltese) Hawnhekk, Zyxel, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 2014/53/UE. Nederlands

(Dutch) Hierbij verklaart Zyxel dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 2014/53/EU. Polski (Polish) Niniejszym Zyxel owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 2014/53/UE. Portugus

(Portuguese) Zyxel declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 2014/53/

UE. Prin prezenta, Zyxel declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 2014/53/UE. Zyxel tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 2014/53/E. Zyxel izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 2014/53/EU. Romn

(Romanian) Slovenina

(Slovak) Slovenina

(Slovene) Suomi (Finnish) Zyxel vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 2014/53/EU oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Svenska

(Swedish) Hrmed intygar Zyxel att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 2014/53/EU. Norsk

(Norwegian) Erklrer herved Zyxel at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 2014/53/EU. Notes:

Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 2014/53/EU has also been implemented in those countries. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used (specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). PX7511-B0 Users Guide 329 Appendix D Legal Information List of national codes COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE Czech Republic Austria Belgium Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia AT BE BG HR CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IS IE IT LV Safety Warnings Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Switzerland Sweden Turkey United Kingdom LI LT LU MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SK SI ES CH SE TR GB Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do not store things on the device. Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa. Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. Only qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor a power outlet. or cord. Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic devices. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product. The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,

- For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;

- For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11. PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040.10 ET 1040.11. Important Safety Instructions Caution! The RJ-45 jacks are not used for telephone line connection. Caution! To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger (e.g., 24 AWG) UL Listed or CSA Certified Telecommunication Line Cord. Caution! Do not use this product near water, for example a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Caution! Avoid using this product (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Caution! Always disconnect all telephone lines from the wall outlet before servicing or disassembling this product. Attention: Les prises RJ-45 ne sont pas utiliss pour la connexion de la ligne tlphonique. Attention: Pour rduire les risques d'incendie n'utiliser que des cbles de type 26 AWG ou des cbles de connexion plus pais. Attention: Ne pas utiliser ce produit prs de l'eau, par exemple un sous-sol humide ou prs d'une piscine. Attention: vitez d'utiliser ce produit (autre qu'un type sans fil) pendant un orage. Il peut y avoir un risque de choc lectrique de la foudre. Attention: Toujours dbrancher toutes les lignes tlphoniques de la prise murale avant de rparer ou de dmonter ce produit. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 330 Appendix D Legal Information Environment Statement ErP (Energy-related Products) Zyxel products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published Directive 2009/

125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called as "ErP Directive

(Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures, power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:

Network standby power consumption < 8W, and/or Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.

(Wireless setting, please refer to the chapter about wireless settings for more detail.) European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development. Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gem den rtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmll entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natrliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schtzen. El smbolo de abajo indica que segn las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batera debern depositarse como basura separada de la domstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida til, llvelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el producto, la recogida por separado ste y/o su batera ayudar a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y medioambiental. Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les rglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent tre limins sparment des ordures mnagres. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte spare de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera conomiser les ressources naturelles et protger l'environnement et la sant humaine. Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana. Symbolen innebr att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat frn hushllsavfallet. Nr den hr produkten nr slutet av sin livslngd ska du ta den till en tervinningsstation. Vid tiden fr kasseringen bidrar du till en bttre milj och mnsklig hlsa genom att gra dig av med den p ett tervinningsstlle.

PX7511-B0 Users Guide 331 Appendix D Legal Information

( : / 110V AC 230V AC)

About the Symbols Various symbols are used in this product to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage. The meaning of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the contents. Explanation of the Symbols SYMBOL EXPLANATION Alternating current (AC):

AC is an electric current in which the flow of electric charge periodically reverses direction. DC if the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers. A wiring terminal intended for connection of a Protective Earthing Conductor. Direct current (DC):

Earth; ground:

Class II equipment:

The method of protection against electric shock in the case of class II equipment is either double insulation or reinforced insulation. Viewing Certifications Zyxel Limited Warranty Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this products documentation and certifications. Zyxel warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized Zyxel local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Zyxel will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of Zyxel. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Zyxel shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 332 Appendix D Legal Information Registration Open Source Licenses Register your product online to receive email notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it. PX7511-B0 Users Guide 333 Index Index A ACK message 245 ACL rule 203 activation firewalls 199 SIP ALG 175 SSID 94 Address Resolution Protocol 264 applications Internet access 18 applications, NAT 180 ARP Table 264, 266 authentication 106, 108 RADIUS server 108 B backup configuration 296 Basic Service Set, see BSS blinking LEDs 20 Broadband 74 broadcast 86 BSS 108 example 109 BYE request 245 C CA 217 call history 239 call hold 250, 252 call service mode 250, 251 call transfer 251, 252 call waiting 251, 252 certificate factory default 218 certificates 217 authentication 217 CA creating 218 public key 217 replacing 218 storage space 218 Certification Authority 217 Certification Authority. see CA certifications 330 viewing 332 CFI 85 channel, wireless LAN 106 Class of Service 248 Class of Service, see CoS client list 123 client-server protocol 242 comfort noise generation 247 configuration backup 296 firewalls 199 reset 297 restoring 297 static route 138, 140, 183 contact information 308 copyright 326 CoS 161, 248 CoS technologies 146 creating certificates 218 CTS threshold 102, 106 customer support 308 D data fragment threshold 102, 106 DDoS 199 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI default server address 174 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 334 Index filters MAC address 97, 107 Finger 181 firewalls 198 add protocols 201 configuration 199 DDoS 199 DoS 199 LAND attack 199 Ping of Death 199 SYN attack 199 firmware 294 version 64 flash key 250 flashing 250 forwarding ports 166 fragmentation threshold 102, 106 FTP 166, 181 Denials of Service, see DoS DHCP 118, 135 differentiated services 249 Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 161 DiffServ (Differentiated Services) 248 DiffServ 161 marking rule 161 code points 248 marking rule 249 digital IDs 217 disclaimer 326 DMZ 173 DNS 118, 135 DNS server address assignment 86 Domain Name 181 Domain Name System, see DNS Domain Name System. See DNS. DS, dee differentiated services DoS 199 DS field 161, 249 DSCP 161, 248 dynamic DNS 182 wildcard 182 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP DYNDNS wildcard 182 G.168 247 HTTP 181 G H I ICMPv6 186 IEEE 802.1Q 85 IGA 178 IGMP 86 IGMPv2 186 IGMPv3 186 ILA 178 ECHO 181 echo cancellation 247 e-mail log example 292 Encapsulation 84 MER 84 PPP over Ethernet 84 encryption 108 E F Europe type call service mode 250 Extended Service Set IDentification 91, 96 multicast group list 186, 269, 270 version 86 IGMP Fast Leave 186 Fast Leave 188 Inside Global Address, see IGA Inside Local Address, see ILA PX7511-B0 Users Guide 335 interface group 192 Internet wizard setup 32 Internet access wizard setup 32 Internet Protocol version 6 75 Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6 Intra LAN Multicast 188 IP address 117, 135 ping 299 private 136 WAN 75 IP Address Assignment 85 IP alias NAT applications 180 IPv6 75, 314 addressing 75, 86, 314 EUI-64 316 global address 314 interface ID 316 link-local address 314 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 314 ping 314 prefix 75, 87, 314 prefix delegation 77 prefix length 75, 87, 314 unspecified address 315 ITU-T 247 key combinations 253 keypad 253 K L LAN 117 client list 123 DHCP 118, 135 DNS 118, 135 IP address 117, 119, 135 MAC address 124 status 64, 69 subnet mask 118, 119, 135 Index LAN to LAN multicast 188 LAND attack 199 limitations wireless LAN 108 WPS 115 listening port 233 login 24 passwords 24 logs 254, 257, 269, 290 M MAC address 98, 124 filter 97, 107 MAC authentication 97 Mac filter 207 managing the device good habits 19 MBSSID 109 MLD 186 MLDv1 186 MLDv2 186 N NAT 165, 167, 178, 179 applications 180 IP alias 180 example 180 global 179 IGA 178 ILA 178 inside 179 local 179 outside 179 port forwarding 166 port number 181 services 181 MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 85 multicast 86 Multicast Listener Discovery, see MLD multimedia 241 Multiple BSS, see MBSSID PX7511-B0 Users Guide 336 Network Address Translation, see NAT network applications 17 SIP ALG 174 activation 175 NAT example 181 Network Map 61 network map 27 NNTP 181 non-proxy calls 238 OK response 245, 246 O P passwords 24 PBC 110 peer-to-peer calls 238 Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 161 PHB 161, 249 phone book speed dial 238 phone functions 253 PIN, WPS 111 example 112 Ping of Death 199 POP3 181 port forwarding 166 ports 20 PPPoE 85 Benefits 85 PPTP 181 preamble 103, 106 preamble mode 109 prefix delegation 77 private IP address 136 Push Button Configuration, see PBC push button, WPS 110 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol, see PPTP Index Q R QoS 145, 161, 248 marking 146 setup 145 tagging 146 versus CoS 146 Quality of Service, see QoS RADIUS server 108 Real time Transport Protocol, see RTP restoring configuration 297 reset 23, 297 restart 298 RFC 1058. See RIP. RFC 1389. See RIP. RFC 1889 244 RFC 3164 254 RIP 144 Routing Information Protocol. See RIP RTP 244 RTS threshold 102, 106 S security wireless LAN 106 Security Log 256 Security Parameter Index, see SPI service access control 278 Service Set 91, 96 Services 181 Session Initiation Protocol, see SIP setup firewalls 199 static route 138, 140, 183 silence suppression 247 Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM SIP 241 account 241 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 337 call progression 244 client 242 identities 241 INVITE request 245, 246 number 241 OK response 246 proxy server 242 redirect server 243 register server 244 servers 242 service domain 241 URI 241 user agent 242 SIP ALG 174 activation 175 SMTP 181 SNMP 181 SNMP trap 181 speed dial 238 SPI 199 srTCM 163 SSID 107 activation 94 MBSSID 109 static route 137, 144 configuration 138, 140, 183 example 137 supplementary services 249 static VLAN status 60 firmware version 64 LAN 64, 69 WAN 64 wireless LAN 64 status indicators 20 subnet mask 118, 135 SYN attack 199 syslog protocol 254 severity levels 254 system firmware 294 version 64 passwords 24 reset 23 status 60 LAN 64, 69 Index WAN 64 wireless LAN 64 time 284 Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID three-way conference 251, 252 data fragment 102, 106 RTS/CTS 102, 106 T TCI The 75 thresholds time 284 ToS 248 TPID 85 trTCM 164 U unicast 86 Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM Type of Service, see ToS Uniform Resource Identifier 241 Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP upgrading firmware 294 UPnP 125 cautions 118 NAT traversal 118 USA type call service mode 251 V VID VAD 247 Vendor ID 132 Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN VLAN 85 Introduction 85 number of possible VIDs PX7511-B0 Users Guide 338 Index Wireless tutorial 39 wizard setup Internet 32 WPS 110, 112 example 113 limitations 115 PIN 111 example 112 push button 110 Z ZyXEL Family Safety page 213 priority frame static VLAN ID 85 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 85 voice activity detection 247 voice coding 246 VoIP 241 peer-to-peer calls 238 VoIP status 261 status 64 Wide Area Network, see WAN 74 W WAN Wake on LAN 133 warranty 332 note 332 web configurator login 24 passwords 24 WEP Encryption 93 wireless LAN 88, 104 authentication 106, 108 BSS 108 example 109 channel 106 encryption 108 example 105 fragmentation threshold 102, 106 limitations 108 MAC address filter 97, 107 MBSSID 109 preamble 103, 106 RADIUS server 108 RTS/CTS threshold 102, 106 security 106 SSID 107 activation 94 status 64 WPS 110, 112 example 113 limitations 115 PIN 111 push button 110 PX7511-B0 Users Guide 339

C HAP T ER 7 Wireless 7.1 Wireless Overview Network Setting > Wireless 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Wireless General Guest/More AP MAC Authentication WPS WMM Others Channel Status 7.1.2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Finding Out More 88 7.2 Wireless General Settings PSK More Secure WPA2-

Apply Network Setting Wireless General 89 Figure 47 90 LABEL DESCRIPTION Keep the same settings for 2.4G and 5G wireless networks 5GHz 2.4GHz Auto 20MHz/40MHz/80MHz 20MHz/40MHz/80MHz/160MHz 20MHz 40MHz, 20MHz/40MHz 20MHz 40MHz/80MHz/160MHz 40MHz 20MHz/40MHz Lower Upper 20/40MHz 20MHz/

Bandwidth Channel WPS Network Setting Wireless 91 LABEL DESCRIPTION More Secure (Recommended) No Security Cancel Apply 7.2.1 No Security No Security Figure 48 LABEL DESCRIPTION No Security 7.2.2 More Secure (Recommended) Network Setting Wireless General More Secure WPA2-PSK WPA2-EAP Security Mode 92 Figure 49 LABEL DESCRIPTION More Secure WPA2-PSK WPA2-EAP Generate password automatically Password AES WPA2-EAP Security Mode 93 LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA2-EAP Security Mode Timer 7.3 Guest/More AP Network Setting > Wireless Guest/More AP WIRELESS NETWORKS WHERE TO CONFIGURE Figure 50 LABEL DESCRIPTION 94 LABEL DESCRIPTION Home Guest External Guest N/A Edit 7.3.1 The Edit Guest/More AP Screen Edit Guest/More AP 95 Figure 51 96 LABEL DESCRIPTION Scenario Home Guest External Guest Access Enable Keep the same settings for 2.4G and 5G wireless networks Network Setting Wireless > General Network Setting Wireless WPS More Secure (Recommended) No Security WPA2-PSK WPA2-EAP 97 LABEL DESCRIPTION Generate password automatically AES WPA2-EAP Security Mode WPA2-EAP Security Mode Timer Cancel OK 7.4 MAC Authentication

(Deny)

(Allow) 98 Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication Figure 52 LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Deny Allow MAC Restrict Mode Disable Deny Allow Edit Delete Cancel Apply 99 7.4.1 Add/Edit MAC Addresses Add new MAC address Network Setting Wireless MAC Authentication Figure 53 7.5 WPS Settings PBC SSID1 SSID1 WPA2-PSK No Security Network Setting > Wireless > WPS Apply 100 Figure 54 LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply WPS Apply 101 LABEL DESCRIPTION Register Apply Generate New PIN Cancel Apply 7.6 WMM Settings Network Setting > Wireless > WMM Figure 55 WMM WMM Automatic Power Save APSD WMM APSD WMM 102 LABEL DESCRIPTION On 802.11 Mode Network Setting > Wireless > Others Cancel Apply 7.7 Others Settings Figure 56 Network Setting > Wireless > Others 103 LABEL DESCRIPTION 60% 80% 100%

20% 40%

802.11b Only 802.11g Only 802.11n Only 802.11b/g Mixed 802.11b/g/n Mixed 802.11b/g/n/ax Mixed 802.11a Only 802.11n Only 802.11ac Only 802.11a/n Mixed 802.11n/ac Mixed 802.11a/n/ac Mixed 802.11a/n/ac/ax Mixed 104 LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Off Disable Capable Required Cancel Apply Off 802.11 Mode 802.11b Only Long Short Network Setting > Wireless > General 802.11 Mode 802.11b 802.11b/g Mixed WPA2-PSK Security Mode AES 7.8 Channel Status Settings Channel Status Wireless > Channel Status Channel Scan Result Scan Network Setting >

105 Figure 57 7.9 Technical Reference 7.9.1 Wireless Network Overview 106 Figure 58 AP A B Radio Channels 107 7.9.2 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION 7.9.3 Wireless Security Overview 108 7.9.3.1 SSID 7.9.3.2 MAC Address Filter 7.9.3.3 User Authentication 109 7.9.3.4 Encryption 7.9.4 Signal Problems 7.9.5 BSS 110 Figure 59 7.9.6 MBSSID 7.9.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs 7.9.7 Preamble Type 111 7.9.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) 7.9.8.1 Push Button Configuration 1 2 3 4 112 7.9.8.2 PIN Configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 113 Figure 60 7.9.8.3 How WPS Works 114 Figure 61 7.9.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup Client 1 1 AP1 Client 1 AP1 115 Figure 62 2 AP1 Client 2 Figure 63 Client 1 AP1 AP1 AP1 AP2 AP2 AP1 Client 2 116 Figure 64 7.9.8.5 Limitations of WPS 117 118

C HAP T ER 8 Home Networking 8.1 Home Networking Overview Figure 65 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter LAN Setup Static DHCP UPnP Additional Subnet STB Vendor ID Wake on LAN TFTP Server Name 8.1.2 What You Need To Know 8.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address 119 Subnet Mask DHCP DNS RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) 8.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices NAT Traversal Cautions with UPnP 120 UPnP and Zyxel Finding Out More 8.1.3 Before You Begin 8.2 LAN Setup Network Setting > Home Networking LAN Setup 1 2 IP Address IP Subnet Mask 121 3 Apply Figure 66 122 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Standard Mode Blocking Mode Enable Disable DHCP Relay DHCP Relay DHCP Enable DHCP Enable DHCP Enable DHCP From ISP DNS Proxy Static 123 LABEL DESCRIPTION Standard Mode Blocking Mode Stateless Stateful From Router Advertisement From DHCPv6 Server From RA & DHCPv6 Server DHCPv6 Server Stateful LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup 124 LABEL DESCRIPTION From ISP User-Defined None IPv4/IPv6 DNS Server IPv6 DNS Server Only IPv4 DNS Server Only IPv6 DNS Server First IPv4 DNS Server First Cancel Apply 8.3 LAN Static DHCP Networking > Static DHCP Figure 67 Network Setting > Home 125 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete Static DHCP Configuration Static DHCP Edit Figure 68 LABEL DESCRIPTION 126 LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 Manual Input Manual Input Cancel OK 8.4 UPnP Settings Manual Input UPnP NAT-T NAT Network Setting Broadband Edit Add New Network Setting >

Home Networking > UPnP WAN Interface Figure 69 127 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.4.1 Turning on UPnP in Windows 7 Example Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP 1 Control Panel Network and Sharing Center. 128 2 Change Advanced Sharing Settings 3 Turn on network discovery Save Changes 129 8.4.2 Turning on UPnP in Windows 10 Example Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP 1 Settings Network & Internet 2 Network and Sharing Center 130 3 Change advanced sharing settings 4 Domain Turn on network discovery Save Changes 131 8.5 LAN Additional Subnet 132 Public LAN Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet Figure 70 LABEL DESCRIPTION 133 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.6 STB Vendor ID Network Setting Home Networking STB Vendor ID Figure 71 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 134 8.7 Wake on LAN Network Setting Home Networking Wake on LAN Figure 72 LABEL DESCRIPTION Manual MAC Address Wake by Address 8.8 TFTP Server Name TFTP Server Name 135 Network Setting Home Networking TFTP Server Name Figure 73 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 8.9 Technical Reference 8.9.1 LANs, WANs and the Zyxel Device Figure 74 136 8.9.2 DHCP Setup IP Pool Setup 8.9.3 DNS Server Addresses 8.9.4 LAN TCP/IP IP Address and Subnet Mask 137 DNS Server DHCP Setup DHCP Setup Private IP Addresses 138 C HAP T ER 9 Routing A A R1 R2 R3 9.1 Overview Figure 75 9.2 Static Route Settings Network Setting > Routing > Static Route 139 Figure 76 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Add new static route Routing Edit Gateway IP Address Interface Use 140 Figure 77 LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 IPv6 Cancel Apply 141 9.3 DNS Route Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route Figure 78 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 9.3.1 Add DNS Route Setting > Routing > DNS Route Add New DNS Route Network 142 Figure 79 LABEL DESCRIPTION ETHWAN 9.4 Policy Route Setting > Routing > Policy Route Policy Route Figure 80 Network 143 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 144 9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Route Add New Policy Route Policy Route Edit Figure 81 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ETHWAN Cancel OK 145 9.5 RIP Settings Network Setting > Routing > RIP RIP Figure 82 2 1 1 LABEL DESCRIPTION Passive Active Cancel Apply 146

C HAP T ER 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.1 QoS Overview 1 2 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter General Queue Setup Classification Setup Shaper Setup Policer Setup Monitor Setup 147 10.2 What You Need to Know QoS versus CoS Tagging and Marking Traffic Shaping 148 Traffic Policing 10.3 Quality of Service General Settings Network Setting > QoS > General 1 WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth 2 WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth 3 WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Upstream Traffic Priority Upstream Traffic Priority Upstream Traffic Priority Assigned by QoS None 149 Figure 83 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable 150 LABEL DESCRIPTION None:

Ethernet Priority:

IP Precedence:

Packet Length:

Cancel Apply 10.4 Queue Setup Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup Priority Figure 84 151 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Add New Queue Edit Queue Setup Figure 85 152 LABEL DESCRIPTION Drop Tail (DT) Drop Tail (DT) Cancel OK 10.5 QoS Classification Setup Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup Figure 86 153 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Add New Classification Classification Setup Edit 154 Figure 87 155 LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Last Interface IP 802.1Q TCP UDP IP Protocol From TCP UDP IP Protocol 156 LABEL DESCRIPTION User defined TCP UDP ICMP IGMP Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60) Client ID (DHCP Option 61) User Class ID (DHCP Option 77) Vendor Specific Info (DHCP Option 125) IP Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type 802.1Q Ether Type 802.1Q Ether Type IP Ether Type IP Ether Type Remark Unchange Remark Remove Add Unchange 157 LABEL DESCRIPTION Unchange Unchange Cancel OK 10.6 QoS Shaper Setup Figure 88 Queue Setup Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 158 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Shaper Add New Shaper Shaper Setup Edit Figure 89 LABEL DESCRIPTION ETHWAN Cancel OK 10.7 QoS Policer Setup

> QoS > Policer Setup Figure 90 159 Network Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 10.7.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer Add New Policer Policer Setup Edit 160 Figure 91 LABEL DESCRIPTION Simple Token Bucket Single Rate Three Color Marker Two Rate Three Color Marker b 161 LABEL DESCRIPTION Pass:

DSCP Mark:

Pass Drop DSCP Mark Drop:

DSCP Mark:

Selected Class Cancel OK Available Class

Selected Class

10.8 QoS Monitor Network Setting QoS Monitor 162 Figure 92 LABEL DESCRIPTION None 10.9 Technical Reference IEEE 802.1Q Tag 163 PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE DiffServ DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior IP Precedence 164 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY QUEUE IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY (ETHERNET PRIORITY) TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH

(BYTE) 165 Token Bucket b b Single Rate Three Color Marker 166 Two Rate Three Color Marker 167 C HAP T ER 11 Network Address Translation

(NAT) 11.1 NAT Overview 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 11.1.2 What You Need To Know Port Forwarding Port Triggering DMZ ALG Sessions Address Mapping Inside/Outside Global/Local NAT 168 Port Forwarding Finding Out More 11.2 Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) B A C 169 Figure 93 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding Figure 94 LABEL DESCRIPTION 170 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete TCP UDP TCP/UDP 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding Add New Rule Port Forwarding Edit Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port Start Start Port 171 Figure 95 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Enable 172 LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Start Port Enable Cancel OK 11.3 Port Triggering End Port End Start Port TCP UDP TCP/UDP 173 Figure 96 1 2 3 4 5 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering Figure 97 174 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 11.3.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule Edit Add new rule Port Triggering 175 Figure 98 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Disable Cancel OK 11.4 DMZ Settings TCP UDP TCP/UDP TCP UDP TCP/UDP 176 Apply Address Figure 99 Apply Default Server Address Default Server LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT Port Forwarding Default Server Address NAT Port Forwarding Cancel Apply 11.5 ALG Settings Network Setting > NAT > ALG 177 Figure 100 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 11.6 Address Mapping Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping Figure 101 178 One-to-One Many-to-One One-to-One Many-to-

LABEL DESCRIPTION One One-to-One Many-to-One Many-to-Many Edit Delete 11.6.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule Mapping Add new rule Address 179 Figure 102 LABEL DESCRIPTION One-to-One Many-to-One Many-to-Many One Cancel OK 11.7 NAT Sessions 180 One-to-One Many-to-One One-to-One Many-to-

Setting > NAT > Sessions Apply Figure 103 Network MAX NAT Session Per Host MAX NAT Session Per Host Apply LABEL DESCRIPTION 11.8 Technical Reference 11.8.1 NAT Definitions 181 ITEM DESCRIPTION 11.8.2 What NAT Does Address Translator (NAT) 11.8.3 How NAT Works RFC 1631 The IP Network 182 Figure 104 11.8.4 NAT Application Figure 105 183 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER Port Forwarding Example B Figure 106 A C 184

C HAP T ER 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.1 DNS Overview DNS Broadband Dynamic DNS 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter DNS Entry Dynamic DNS 12.1.2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard 185 DNS DNS Entry Network Setting >

12.2 DNS Entry Figure 107 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry Entry DNS Entry Edit Add New DNS 186 Figure 108 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 12.3 Dynamic DNS Figure 109 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS 187 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Success Cancel Apply 188 C HAP T ER 13 IGMP/MLD 13.1 IGMP/MLD Overview IGMP/MLD 13.1.1 What You Need To Know Multicast and IGMP Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) IGMP Fast Leave 13.2 IGMP/MLD Settings Network Setting > IGMP/MLD 189 Figure 110 LABEL DESCRIPTION 190 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 191 C HAP T ER 14 VLAN Group 14.1 Overview Figure 111 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter 192 14.2 The VLAN Group Screen Figure 112 Network Setting > VLAN Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 14.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group Add New VLAN Group VLAN Group Figure 113 193 LABEL DESCRIPTION TX Tagging Include TX Tagging Cancel OK VLAN ID 194 C HAP T ER 15 Interface Grouping 15.1 Interface Grouping Overview 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Interface Grouping 15.2 Interface Grouping Setup LAN Setup 195 Figure 114 Network Setting > Interface Grouping Figure 115 LABEL DESCRIPTION 196 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration Add New Interface Group Interface Grouping 197 Figure 116 LABEL DESCRIPTION None Interfaces Selected LAN Interfaces Available LAN Selected LAN Interfaces 198 LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Edit Delete Cancel OK Figure 117 15.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria Add Interface Grouping Configuration 199 LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Setting > Vlan Group Cancel OK 200 C HAP T ER 16 Firewall 16.1 Firewall Overview A Figure 118 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter General Protocol Access Control DoS 201 16.1.2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack DoS DDoS LAND Attack Ping of Death SPI 16.2 Firewall Settings 202 High Security > Firewall General Figure 119 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Low Medium High Cancel Apply 203 16.3 Protocol Settings Protocol Security > Firewall > Protocol Figure 120 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP TCP/UDP Other Edit Delete 16.3.1 Add New/Edit Protocol Entry Add New Protocol Entry Edit Protocol 204 Figure 121 LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP ICMPv6 Other Other Other TCP UDP TCP UDP ICMPv6 Any Single Any Single Range Range Cancel OK 16.4 Access Control Security > Firewall > Access Control 205 Figure 122 LABEL DESCRIPTION Any Any ACCEPT Edit Delete Move To DROP REJECT 16.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule Add new ACL rule Edit Access Control 206 Figure 123 LABEL DESCRIPTION Specific IP Address 207 LABEL DESCRIPTION Specific IP Address IPv4 IPv6 Security > Firewall > Protocol > Add Specific Service Specific ProtocolService Select Service TCP/UDP TCP UDP ICMP ICMPv6 TCP UDP Protocol Specific ProtocolService Select Service TCP UDP Protocol Specific ProtocolService Select Service TCP Protocol RST FIN Specific ProtocolService Select Service SYN ACK URG PSH Specific ProtocolService Select Service ICMPv6 DROP REJECT ACCEPT Add New Rule Security > Scheduler Rules Cancel OK 16.5 DoS Settings DoS Security > Firewall > DoS 208 Figure 124 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Cancel Apply 209 C HAP T ER 17 MAC Filter 17.1 MAC Filter Overview MAC Filter 17.2 MAC Filter Settings MAC Address Filter Figure 125 Security MAC Filter Active 210 Figure 126 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Allow Deny Delete Cancel Apply Active Allow 211 C HAP T ER 18 Parental Control 18.1 Parental Control Overview 18.2 Parental Control Settings Security Parental Control Figure 127 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable 212 LABEL DESCRIPTION None None Edit Delete Cancel Apply 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile Add new PCP Parental Control Edit 213 Figure 128 214 Table 85 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Disable Custom All Home Network User Custom Add Delete Authorized access Service Name Protocol Port No access Block Allow Edit Delete Add Edit Delete Block the Web URLs Allow the Web URLs 215 Table 85 LABEL DESCRIPTION Figure 129 Cancel OK Add New Service Figure 130 Table 86 LABEL DESCRIPTION User Define TCP UDP TCP & UDP Service Name Service Name 216 Table 86 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK Add Site/URL Keyword Figure 131 Add Site/URL Keyword Edit/Add new PCP Table 87 LABEL DESCRIPTION OK Cancel OK 217 C HAP T ER 19 Scheduler Rule 19.1 Scheduler Rule Overview 19.2 Scheduler Rule Settings Security > Scheduler Rule Figure 132 LABEL DESCRIPTION 19.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule Rule Add New Rule Scheduler Rule Edit Edit Delete 218 Figure 133 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 219 C HAP T ER 20 Certificates 20.1 Certificates Overview 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Local Certificates Trusted CA 20.2 What You Need to Know Certification Authority 20.3 Local Certificates Security > Certificates Local Certificates 220 Figure 134 LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Choose File 20.3.1 Create Certificate Request Security Certificates Local Certificates Create Certificate Request Not Yet Valid!

Expiring!

Expired!

View Load Signed Remove 221 Figure 135 LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Customize Cancel OK 20.3.2 View Certificate Request View Local Certificates Private Key Certificate 222 Figure 136 LABEL DESCRIPTION ca 223 LABEL DESCRIPTION Back 20.4 Trusted CA Security > Certificates > Trusted CA Figure 137 LABEL DESCRIPTION 224 LABEL DESCRIPTION ca View Remove 20.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate View Trusted CA Figure 138 225 LABEL DESCRIPTION Back 20.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Import Certificate Trusted CA Figure 139 LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Choose File Cancel OK 226

C HAP T ER 21 VoIP 21.1 Overview 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter SIP Account SIP Service Provider Phone Device Region Call Rule Call History 227 21.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP VoIP SIP SIP Accounts SIP Address How to Find Out More 21.2 Before You Begin 228 21.3 The SIP Account Screen VoIP > SIP > SIP Account Figure 140 LABEL DESCRIPTION 21.3.1 The SIP Account Add/Edit Screen Add New Account Edit VoIP > SIP >

Phone Device SIP Account more Edit Delete less 229 Figure 141 230 LABEL DESCRIPTION ADD_NEWChangeMe Provider SIP Service SIP TEL G.711a G.711u G.726-24 G.726-32 G.722 24 32 G.729 None None 231 LABEL DESCRIPTION To Number To Number No Answer Time To Number Active No Answer Forward 232 LABEL DESCRIPTION None Email Notification Early Media Music on Hold Cancel OK 21.4 The SIP Service Provider Screen VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider Figure 142 233 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete 21.4.1 The SIP Service Provider Add/Edit Screen Edit VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider Add New Provider 234 Figure 143 235 LABEL DESCRIPTION ADD_NEW Enable SIP Service Provider SIP Server Address SIP Server Port Any_WAN Multi_WAN 236 LABEL DESCRIPTION Start Port End Port Start Port End Port AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 AES_CM_128_NULL NULL_CIPHER_HMAC_SHA1_80 RFC2833 PCM SIP INFO Enable UDP TCP G.711Mulaw G.711Alaw 237 LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Server Port REGISTER Server Port Transport Type General AUTO Cancel OK 21.5 The Phone Device Screen VoIP Phone > Phone Device 238 Figure 144 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit 21.5.1 The Phone Device Edit Screen

> Phone > Phone Device Edit VoIP 239 Figure 145 Selection VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add New Provider/Edit Dialing Interval LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 240 21.6 The Phone Region Screen VoIP > Phone > Region Figure 146 LABEL DESCRIPTION Europe Type USA Type 21.7 The Call Rule Screen 241 Figure 147 LABEL DESCRIPTION 21.8 The Call History Screen VoIP > Call History > Call History 242 Figure 148 LABEL DESCRIPTION Export All Incoming Outgoing Missed Delete 243 21.9 The Call Summary Screen VoIP > Call History > Call Summary Figure 149 LABEL DESCRIPTION 21.10 Technical Reference VoIP VoIP SIP 244 SIP Identities SIP Number SIP Service Domain SIP Registration Authorization Requirements 245 SIP Servers SIP User Agent Figure 150 SIP Proxy Server A B A B 1 2 A B A C 246 Figure 151 SIP Redirect Server 247 A C 1 2 3 A A C B A C C Figure 152 SIP Register Server RTP Pulse Code Modulation SIP Call Progression A B 248 1 A B B B 4 A 2 3 5 6 7 B B B A B A SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers Figure 153 PROXY 1 PROXY 2 UA 1 UA 2 DSL DSL 249 UA 1 PROXY 1 PROXY 2 UA 2 1 User Agent 1 User Agent 2 Proxy 1 Proxy 1 User 2 Proxy 1 Proxy 2 Proxy 2 User Agent 1 Proxy 1 User Agent 2 Proxy 2 Proxy 2 6 User Agent 1 User Agent 2 3 4 5 7 8 Proxy 2 User Agent 2 User Agent 2 Agent 1 Proxy 1 User Agent 2 User Agent 1 Voice Coding 250 Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression Comfort Noise Generation Echo Cancellation MWI (Message Waiting Indication) Custom Tones (IVR) LABEL DESCRIPTION Recording Custom Tones 251 Early Media Music On Hold 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 Listening to Custom Tones Deleting Custom Tones 21.10.1 Quality of Service (QoS) Type of Service (ToS) DiffServ 252 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior Figure 154 21.10.2 Phone Services Overview 253 21.10.2.1 The Flash Key 21.10.2.2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services Mode Europe Type Call Service COMMAND SUB-COMMAND DESCRIPTION European Call Hold A B A 254 European Call Waiting European Call Transfer European Three-Way Conference 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 255 21.10.2.3 USA Type Supplementary Services USA Type Call Service Mode COMMAND SUB-COMMAND DESCRIPTION USA Call Hold A A B USA Call Waiting USA Call Transfer USA Three-Way Conference 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 256 5 6 7 21.10.2.4 Phone Functions Summary ACTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 257 C HAP T ER 22 Log System Errors View Log 22.1 Log Overview 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter System Log Security Log 22.1.2 What You Need To Know Alerts and Logs Syslog Overview CODE SEVERITY 258 System Log Category System Monitor >

CODE SEVERITY 22.2 System Log System Log Level Log System Log Figure 155 LABEL DESCRIPTION SettingE-mail Notification Maintenance > Logs 259 22.3 Security Log Security Log Figure 156 Level Category System Monitor > Log > Security Log LABEL DESCRIPTION SettingE-mail Notification Maintenance > Logs 260 C HAP T ER 23 Traffic Status 23.1 Traffic Status Overview 23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Traffic Status WAN LAN NAT 23.2 WAN Status System Monitor > Traffic Status WAN Figure 157 261 LABEL DESCRIPTION 23.3 LAN Status System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN 262 Figure 158 LABEL DESCRIPTION 23.4 NAT Status System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT 263 Figure 159 LABEL DESCRIPTION 264

C HAP T ER 24 VoIP Status 24.1 The VoIP Status Screen System Monitor > VoIP Status Figure 160 LABEL DESCRIPTION Set Interval Stop 265 LABEL DESCRIPTION Registered Unregistered Register Fail Re-Try Timer Disabled Register Action VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add/Edit > SIP Service Provider > Add/Edit VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add/Edit VoIP > SIP > SIP Provider > Add/Edit > SIP Service Domain Number VoIP > SIP > SIP Service VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add/Edit > SIP Account VoIP >SIP > SIP Account > Add/Edit > Enable MWI Outgoing Call Incoming Call Internal call 266 LABEL DESCRIPTION Outgoing Call Internal Call Ringing Incoming call Hold Outgoing Call Incoming Call Calling InCall Outgoing Call Incoming Call Internal Call Unknown Status Calling Ringing Incoming Call FXS Outgoing Call Internal Call Incoming Call Call Type Outgoing Call FXS Internal Call SIP SIP Outgoing Call Ringing Unknown FXS Incoming Call Internal Call Incoming Call Status Outgoing Call Call Type FXS Unknown Incoming Call Internal Call SIP FXS SIP SIP SIP FXS Unknown Call Type

Internal Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Internal Call VoIP > Phone > Phone Device 267 C HAP T ER 25 ARP Table 25.1 ARP Table Overview 25.1.1 How ARP Works 268 25.2 ARP Table Settings Figure 161 System Monitor ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION 269 C HAP T ER 26 Routing Table 26.1 Routing Table Overview 26.2 Routing Table Settings System Monitor Routing Table 270 Figure 162 LABEL DESCRIPTION U-Up:

!-Reject:

G-Gateway:

H-Host:

R-Reinstate:

D-Dynamic (redirect):

M-Modified (redirect):

271 LABEL DESCRIPTION brx ethx ppp0 wlx wl0 wl0 wl1 wl1 272 C HAP T ER 27 Multicast Status 27.1 Multicast Status Overview Multicast Status 27.2 IGMP Status Network Setting > IGMP/MLD Figure 163 System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION INCLUDE EXCLUDE Source List Source List 273 27.3 MLD Status MLD Status Figure 164 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD System Monitor > Multicast Status >

LABEL DESCRIPTION INCLUDE EXCLUDE Source List Source List 274 C HAP T ER 28 WLAN Station Status 28.1 WLAN Station Status Overview System Monitor > WLAN Station Status Figure 165 LABEL DESCRIPTION 275 LABEL DESCRIPTION 5 4 3 2 1 276 C HAP T ER 29 xPON Status 29.1 Overview 29.2 xPON Status Screen System Monitor > xPON Status Figure 166 LABEL DESCRIPTION 277 C HAP T ER 30 System 30.1 System Overview System 30.2 System Settings Maintenance > System Figure 167 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 278 C HAP T ER 31 User Account 31.1 User Account Overview User Account 31.2 User Account Settings Maintenance > User Account Figure 168 LABEL DESCRIPTION 279 LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Delete Cancel Apply 31.2.1 User Account Add/Edit Add New Account Edit Figure 169 Administrator User Retry Times Maintenance > User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Disable 280 LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator User Retry Times Cancel OK 281 C HAP T ER 32 Remote Management 32.1 Remote Management Overview 32.2 MGMT Services Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services Figure 170 282 LABEL DESCRIPTION Any_WAN Multi_WAN Enable Enable Enable Domain Cancel Apply Figure 171 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > Trust Trust Domain WAN Trust Domain 32.3 Trust Domain Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services Maintenance Remote Management > Trust Domain 283 LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete 32.4 Add Trust Domain Add Trust Domain Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain Figure 172 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel OK 284 C HAP T ER 33 SNMP 33.1 SNMP Overview Figure 173 285 33.2 SNMP Settings Maintenance > SNMP Figure 174 LABEL DESCRIPTION Get Community 286 LABEL DESCRIPTION Set Community Trap Community Cancel Apply 287 C HAP T ER 34 Time Settings 34.1 Time Settings Overview 34.2 Time Maintenance > Time Maintenance > Time 288 Figure 175 289 LABEL DESCRIPTION Other None TimeHour TimeHour Hour Hour Cancel Apply 290 Second Sunday March 2 March o'clock 2 Hour Last Sunday First Sunday November 2 October o'clock Hour 2 Last Sunday C HAP T ER 35 Email Notification 35.1 Email Notification Overview 35.2 Email Notification Settings Maintenance > Email Notification Email Notification Figure 176 LABEL DESCRIPTION 291 LABEL DESCRIPTION 35.2.1 Email Notification Edit Add Email Notification Figure 177 LABEL DESCRIPTION Account Email Address Account Email Address SSL STARTTLS 292 LABEL DESCRIPTION 293 C HAP T ER 36 Log Setting 36.1 Logs Setting Overview Logs Setting 36.2 Log Settings Maintenance > Log Setting Syslog Logging Remote Local File and Remote Mode Local File Local File and Syslog Server Remote Remote 294 Figure 178 LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote Local File Local File and Remote 295 LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance > Email Notification Cancel Apply 36.2.1 Example Email Log End of Log 296 Figure 179 Subject:

Firewall Alert From Date:

Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42 From:

user@zyxel.com To:

user@zyxel.com 1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward

| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |

..{snip}.. .{snip}.. 126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

End of Firewall Log 297 C HAP T ER 37 Firmware Upgrade 37.1 Firmware Upgrade Overview Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Zyxel Device. 37.2 Firmware Upgrade Settings Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade Do NOT turn off the Zyxel Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 180 LABEL DESCRIPTION 298 LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Figure 181 Upgrade Figure 182 Status OK Firmware 299 C HAP T ER 38 Backup Restore 38.1 Backup/Restore Overview Backup/Restore 38.2 Backup/Restore Settings Maintenance > Backup/Restore Figure 183 Backup Configuration Backup 300 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Do NOT turn off the Zyxel Device while configuration file upload is in progress. Figure 184 ConfigurationBackup/Restore Figure 185 OK Reset to Factory Defaults Reset 301 Figure 186 Figure 187 RESET RESET 38.3 Reboot Maintenance > Reboot Reboot Figure 188 302 C HAP T ER 39 Diagnostic 39.1 Diagnostic Overview Diagnostic 39.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Diagnostic 39.2 What You Need to Know 802.1ag 802.3ah How CFM Works 303 39.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookupDiagnostic Screen Ping&TraceRoute&NsLookup Figure 189 Maintenance > Diagnostic >

LABEL DESCRIPTION 39.4 802.1ag (CFM) Maintenance > Diagnostic 802.1ag 304 Figure 190 LABEL DESCRIPTION Y.1731 305 Y.1731 CCM LABEL DESCRIPTION Y.1731 Enable Pass Fail 39.5 802.3ah (OAM) Maintenance > Diagnostic 803.ah Figure 191 306 LABEL DESCRIPTION Variable Retrieval Link Events Remote Loopback Active Mode 307

C HAP T ER 40 GPON Maintenance > GPON SLID 40.1 Overview 40.2 SLID Figure 192 LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Apply 308 PART III Troubleshooting and Appendices 309 C HAP T ER 41 Troubleshooting 41.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 310 41.2 Zyxel Device Access and Login Start > Run cmd ipconfig Default Gateway 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Login Maintenance > Remote Management 311 Advanced Suggestions Login 1 2 3 4 1 2 Login screen in the Web Configurator. Login screen in the Web Configurator. 41.3 Internet Access Start Guide Quick Network Setting > Broadband 312 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 LAN Start Guide Network Setting > Broadband Network Setting > Interface Group Quick 41.4 Wireless Internet Access 313 41.5 UPnP My Network Places > Local Network 1 2 Local Area Connection 314 A PPE NDI X A Customer Support https://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml https://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml Required Information Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide) Asia Taiwan China India Kazakhstan 315 Korea Malaysia Pakistan Philippines Singapore Taiwan Thailand Vietnam Belarus Belgium Europe 316 Bulgaria Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Hungary Italy Latvia 317 Lithuania Netherlands Norway Poland Romania Russia Slovakia Spain Sweden Switzerland 318 Turkey UK Ukraine South America Argentina Brazil Colombia Ecuador South America Middle East Israel 319 Middle East North America USA Oceania Australia Africa South Africa 320 A PPE NDI X B IPv6 Overview IPv6 Addressing 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15 Prefix and Prefix Length 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 2001:db8 Link-local Address Global Address 321 Unspecified Address Loopback Address Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION MULTICAST ADDRESS 322 MULTICAST ADDRESS Subnet Masking Interface ID EUI-64 MAC EUI-64 Identity Association S1 S2 323 T1 T2 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Rebind to S2 Rebind to S2 DHCP Relay Agent Prefix Delegation ICMPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) 324 IPv6 Cache Multicast Listener Discovery MLD Messages 325 Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista ipv6 ipconfig install C:\>ipv6 install Installing... Succeeded. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IP Address. : 10.1.1.46 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 IP Address. : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4 Default Gateway . : 10.1.1.254 ipconfig Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP 1 2 3 4 Start All Programs Dibbler-DHCPv6 Client Install as service Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Services Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client 326 5 Start OK Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 6 1 2 3 Control Panel Network and Sharing Center Local Area Connection Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) OK 327 Close Local Area Connection Status Start All Programs Accessories Command Prompt 4 5 6 ipconfig C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IPv6 Address. : 2001:b021:2d::1000 Link-local IPv6 Address . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11 IPv4 Address. : 172.16.100.61 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11 172.16.100.254 328 A PPE NDI X C Services Name Protocol Port(s) Protocol Protocol TCP UDP TCP/UDP Protocol USER Description USER-DEFINED Port(s TCP/UDP 329 NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 330 NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 331 NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION 332 A PPE NDI X D Legal Information Copyright Disclaimer Regulatory Notice and Statement UNITED STATES of AMERICA FCC EMC Statement FCC Radiation Exposure Statement CANADA Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada ICES Statement 333 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 Statement Antenna Information NO. MODEL NAME TYPE MANUFACTURER GAIN CONNECTOR Informations Antenne NO. MODEL NAME TYPE MANUFACTURER GAIN CONNECTOR 334 Industry Canada radiation exposure statement Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

EUROPEAN UNION Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive, RED) National Restrictions National Restrictions 335 National Restrictions National Restrictions Notes:

336 List of national codes COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE Safety Warnings Important Safety Instructions Environment Statement ErP (Energy-related Products) 337 European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information 338 About the Symbols Explanation of the Symbols SYMBOL EXPLANATION Viewing Certifications Zyxel Limited Warranty Note Registration 339 Open Source Licenses 340 Index 249 206 202 178 94 268 18 183 268, 270 108, 109 109 A B 300 20 74 86 111 249 110 C 220 242, 244 254, 256 254, 255 255, 256 255, 256 303 221 220 221 220 220 221 220 221 337 339 303 303 107 252 246 251 86 303 303 303 303 303 303 125 300 202 301 301 140, 142, 186 333 164, 252 315 148 221 341 D E 104, 108 315 177 253 202 120, 137 164 220 333 176 120, 137 164 252 253 184 202 164, 253 164, 252 185 185 185 184 85 251 296 85 104, 108 F 164 252 87 85 110 254 91, 97 191 98, 109 204 202 202 202 202 184 201 202 202 298 64 254 254 169 104, 108 169, 184 251 184 G H I 189 86 181 342 189, 273, 274 189 86 86 189 189 181 195 32 32 75 191 119, 137 304 138 75 75, 321 323 85 183 75, 87, 321 321 323 321 321 75, 87, 321 77 75, 87, 321 322 251 K 257 257 L 119 125 120, 137 120, 137 119, 121, 137 126 64, 69 120, 121, 137 191 202 110 303 117 303 24 236 24 258, 261, 273, 294 303 303 303 99, 126 98 98, 109 210 19 111 303 303 189 343 321 M 303 189 189 86 244 86 N 168, 170, 181, 182 183 183 183 182 181 181 182 182 182 169 184 184 177 17 178 184 61 27 241 184 O P 249, 250 24 112 241 164, 253 164 241 257 113 114 202 184 20 85 184 169 85 105, 108 111 77 138 112 147, 164, 252 147 148 148 148 109 23, 301 302 301 248 258 Q R 344 146 248 S 104, 108 108 260 282 91, 97 184 202 140, 142, 186 251 244 245 246 245 245 248 249, 250 250 246 247 248 245 246 245 177 184 184 246 178 184 241 94 202 166 109 111 139, 146 139 140, 142, 186 60 64, 69 64 64 64 20 120, 137 253 258 202 258 298 64 24 23 60 64, 69 64 288 64 255, 256 104, 108 104, 108 T 75 288 252 86 167 345 86 127 298 120 120 245 255 251 134 85 85 86 86 251 250 244 241 265 U V W 74 64 339 339 24 135 24 93 88, 106 108, 109 110 111 107 110 107 110 104, 108 98, 109 111 105, 108 109 104, 108 108 109 64 112, 114 94 115 117 113 112 39 32 112, 114 113 115 117 114 112 Z 216 346

Model Number：DX5510-B0

FCC ID：I88EX5510-B0

Label:

Label Location:

Model Number：EX5510-B0

FCC ID：I88EX5510-B0

IC：2468C-EX5510B0

Label:

Label Location:

Model Number：PX7511-B0

FCC ID：I88EX5510-B0

IC：2468C-EX5510B0

Label:

Label Location:

Date: 2019-09-19 FCC ID: I88EX5510-B0 Declaration for DFS master devices We, Zyxel Communications Corporation hereby declare that the device meets all the other requirements specified in Part 15E Section 15.407. If you should have any question(s) regarding this declaration, please dont hesitate to contact us. Thank you!

Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Confidentiality Request Date: December 24, 2019 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division FCC ID: I88EX5510-B0 To Whom It May Concern, Long Term Confidentiality Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby respectfully request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

Software Operating Description The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. We understand that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Short Term Confidentiality Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby respectfully request short-

term confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below until 180 days after the Grant Date of Equipment Authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until the actual marketing of the device:

Test Setup Photos Sincerely,

Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

FCC ID: I88EX5510-B0 Date: September 19, 2019 A U T H O R I Z A T I O N L E T T E R To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize Debby Lin of Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services

(H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch (BV CPS Taoyuan), to act on its behalf in all matters relating to the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) application for equipment authorization in connection with the FCC ID listed above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Debby Lin of BV CPS Taoyuan on Zyxel Communications Corporations behalf, within the scope of the powers granted herein, shall have the same effect as acts of its own. If you have any questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. Sincerely,

Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Description of Permissive Change Date: 9/4/2019 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: Class II permissive change Applicant: Zyxel Communications Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: I88EX5510-B0 This Equipment is prepared for FCC Reassessment, The difference compared with original is adding DFS band, the product hardware is identical and new band is adding through software enabling. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours,

Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Date: September 19, 2019

We, Zyxel Communications Corporation declare that the device does not support

channel 12 ~ 13 in 2.4GHz band and any non-US channels in all the operational

mode(s) for the following product.

FCC ID: I88EX5510-B0

If you should have any question(s) regarding this declaration, please don’t

hesitate to contact us. Thank you!

----------------------------------------

Emma Bao / Manager

Zyxel Communications Corporation

Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582

E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Confidentiality Request

Date: September 19, 2019

Federal Communications Commission

Authorization and Evaluation Division

FCC ID: I88EX5510-B0

To Whom It May Concern,

Long Term Confidentiality

Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commission’s Rules, we hereby respectfully request

confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

Schematics

Block Diagram

Operational Descriptions

Operational Descriptions-Antenna directional gain.

Software Operating Description

The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to

the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide

unjustified benefits to its competitors.

We understand that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying

documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application.

Short Term Confidentiality

Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commission’s Rules, we hereby respectfully request short-

term confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below until 180

days after the Grant Date of Equipment Authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information

remains confidential until the actual marketing of the device:

External Photos

Internal Photos

Test Setup Photos

User Manual

Sincerely,

----------------------------------------

Emma Bao / Manager

Zyxel Communications Corporation

Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582

E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw